JP7101957B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball wins a prize at a starting port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-29956

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in techniques for improving the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an image of the operation means.
Using a part of the image of the operating means, the time until the operating means becomes operable is displayed.
The time until the operation means becomes operable is displayed, and the character display indicating that the operation of the operation means is suspended is performed by using a special image different from the image of the operation means.
The special image is displayed on the front side of the image of the operating means, and the special image is displayed so as to match the character display with the tilt angle of the image of the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination table T1 to T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the look-ahead staging determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the core production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during a variation effect. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of a movable accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating the button image operation effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the button image operation effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the button image operation effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part partial enlargement display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part partial enlargement display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part partial enlargement display effect C. The image of the operation unit is a diagram for explaining the protruding movement effect A. The image of the operation unit is a diagram for explaining the protruding movement effect B. The image of the operation unit is a diagram for explaining the protruding movement effect C. The image of the operation unit is a diagram for explaining the protruding movement effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the overhang display effect A of the operation part image. It is a figure for demonstrating the overhang display effect B of the operation part image. It is a figure for demonstrating the overhang display effect C of the operation part image. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon / operation part image movement effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon / operation part image movement effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon / operation part image movement effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon / operation part image movement effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon / operation part image superimposition effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon / operation part image superimposition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon / operation part image superimposition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon non-display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon non-display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon non-display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation count effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating operation count effect B (success). It is a figure for demonstrating operation count effect B (failure). It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image movement effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image movement effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image movement effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image tilt display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image tilt display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer image tilt display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer button effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer button effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer pseudo-continuous production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer pseudo continuous effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the acquisition ball number display effect. It is a figure for demonstrating payout display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating payout display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning image-character image superimposition effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning image-character image superimposition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning image-character image superimposition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter effect A in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating the meter effect B in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect A in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect B in a button image. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of variation effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of variation effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of variation effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation charge effect A (success). It is a figure for demonstrating operation charge effect A (failure). It is a figure for demonstrating operation charge effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the pseudo-continuous point effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the pseudo-continuous point effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer freeze effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer freeze effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer freeze effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the chance up meter effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the chance up meter effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the chance up meter effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold timer effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold timer effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold timer effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer payout acquisition effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer payout acquisition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer payout acquisition effect C.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the gaming machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction seen by the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the ball hitting plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during an effect that is executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the production performed as the game progresses. To. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding upward from the front frame 53.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , Gate (through chucker) 28, 1st big winning device (1st attacker) 31, 2nd big winning device (2nd attacker) 36, normal winning opening 27, out opening 16, and indicators. 40 and.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a region and a reserved digested image display region on which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons or first hold icons. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold icon or the second hold icon. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. The middle effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The staging symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the staging symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the staging pattern is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variable display mode of the staging symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. What kind of combination of staging symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "effect symbol variation effect", "decorative symbol variation effect", or simply "variation effect". In this decorative symbol variation effect, the effect in the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a big hit effect performed in parallel with the big hit game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the staging symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved, which will be described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the image is digested (“digestion of special figure hold” described later).

The center decoration body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable board movable body 15 (also referred to as a movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10. A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an inlet portion through which the game balls flow in and an outlet portion through which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a mouth and a fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and the second starting port 21 is required when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. This is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not it is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state) may be configured. In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability variation operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic operating port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. It has. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The ordinary winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The number of ordinary winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left hit". On the other hand, a method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right hit". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting port 21, the first large winning opening 30, and the second large winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 variably displays the ordinary symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit lottery) results will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is the upper limit value for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as the normal symbol hold. It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of ordinary symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a V region. Examples thereof include a sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. The display control of the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball lending device 130 pays out the ball lending. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (effect patterns are displayed). Image data such as) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the staging control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, and the panel movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the panel movable body 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The board movable body 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the panel movable body 15, and controls the operation of the panel movable body 15 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to execute command-based lamp lighting control or operation control of the panel movable body 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

The effect button detection switch 63a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed, a touch sensor provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when the human body comes into contact with the relay board 108. It may be connected.

3. 3. Data structure of the gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5 (A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, and the like. A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, and the like. The V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number value group (holding information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure reservation is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and a drive in which drive data for driving the board movable body 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. A data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the staging control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the staging control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). It is an output buffer), and a variation effect start command, a variation effect pre-end command, a variation effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Probability change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the staging control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used in the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of staging symbols indicating a big hit is won. The staging symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Ordinary symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0 to 255. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the fluctuation effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined as “big hit” and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ) ”, It is shown that it is judged as“ lost ”. Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit", and when the jackpot random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)". Is shown to be determined to be "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined as "with reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). The table referenced to do so. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot" regardless of the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127). It is shown that the stop symbol (special figure stop symbol) of the special figure 2 is determined to be the "big hit symbol 1". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", the "round designation command", and the "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". When it is "2" and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 60", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in a time-saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "big hit", the jackpot type determination table T5 determines "16RV planned passage jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern random value. When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) having different fluctuation times are set. The length of the fluctuation time is SP3> SP2> SP1. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H" or "15H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", the open pattern is "open". It is shown that it is determined as "Pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (prescribed number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”, and the special drawing stop symbol is determined. When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol stop symbol data is determined to be "open pattern 33". When it is "15H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. When the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In game machine 1, there are "big hits" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a jackpot game that opens the jackpots (first jackpot 30 and second jackpot 35) with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The "V-passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V-opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H and 21H correspond to the "V-passing scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71. It is a big hit to operate. Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region is in the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

Although the total number of rounds of the "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantial 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

Although the total number of rounds of the "16R (substantial 15R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" makes it possible for the game ball to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) is reached. That is, the game state after the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" is a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30. ), But the high probability is the latent state (incubation probability change state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60 / for the V-non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, all the jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are the jackpots scheduled to pass V. That is, when a big hit is won by a lottery based on a prize in the second starting port 21 which can be entered by executing the electric support control described later, the big hit scheduled to pass V is always obtained. In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the game state The game state of the game machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply a "normal probability state (normal probability state). Non-high probability state, low probability state) ". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high-probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state when the time is shortened. Determine the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of the normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be hit is larger in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this case), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low-probability state), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". The low accuracy high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". Further, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed is referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. be. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 as compared with the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get a lot of starting prizes rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / miss determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / miss pre-determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. Main control In the main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7 (A). , Ordinary symbol random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 includes a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number value is the first to the first to the normal figure reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If no game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label). -TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The special figure 1 hold ball number is the number of the first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". In the present embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be made using the jackpot determination table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the fluctuation pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time reduction state (the time reduction flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time reduction state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from the random value and the fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is pre-determined from the jackpot pre-judgment result and the reach presence / absence pre-judgment result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1 to 2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In the present embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-judgment may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 is included in the jackpot determination table T1 for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”. ”) To determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has an ordinary symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is determined as "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the game has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the hit determination (step S505) described above is "missing", the fluctuation display is stopped. (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol change processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), the special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a to the side read from the current position by one. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the processing flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is a special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. "To" P3 ", and in Special Figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is referred to (the part from" P21 "to" P23 ") (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”” in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the non-time saving state table (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P7" to The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected depends on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Different from. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) of the above is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the jackpot scheduled to pass V, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the jackpot scheduled to pass V (variation pattern in special figure 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" to "P63" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44”). "To" P46 ") is referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member to the number of rounds according to the type of winning big hit. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set in the time saving counter in the low accuracy and high base state, and "160" is set in the time saving counter in the high accuracy and high base state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is in the probability change state, the probability change counter value, whether or not it is in the time reduction state, the time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening of the big winning opening is temporarily closed after opening, the big winning opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If it is not the time to open the big winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" is set to "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing schedule". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V area 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot", the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not an opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first winning ball has been won in the first large winning opening 30 in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether the V opening / closing member 71 is "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short release (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), and the V-opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And set the V validity period to 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), the second ball is generally won. The time from time to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), V opening / closing member closing process, and V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), this process ends as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "160" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets the probability change counter to "160". The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "160" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 160 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball number processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the Staging Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the staging control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the staging control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The staging control microcomputer 91 first performs reception command analysis processing (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variable staging process is a process for setting a command before the end of the variable at a specific timing during the variable staging to execute a specific display staging on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the processing during the fluctuation effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The staging control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead staging determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). When receiving (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure holding effect counter, the second special figure holding effect counter, and the normal figure holding effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable staging start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the staging control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is issued by the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not it is a high probability state, whether or not it is a time saving state, or whether it is a probability change). The counter, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-pass command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the V-passed information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead staging decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead staging determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The staging control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39 (A), the jackpot determination information “loss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in FIG. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in special figure 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth piece on hold in special figure 2. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the preliminary determination information, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the 1st to 4th storage areas corresponding to the 1st to 4th items on hold in Special Figure 2 and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 The pre-determination information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. When the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command as a “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined by, for example, a fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information). The staging control microcomputer 91 ends this process when the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “loss without reach” (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is "big hit" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 55", the look-ahead effect is "none", and when the look-ahead effect random value is "56 to 67", the look-ahead effect is set as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "loss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108-114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The staging control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variation effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display of a predetermined character and its operation, output of a melody or sound effect using a speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variable staging is completed by superimposing additional staging such as chance-up staging and pre-reading staging on this core staging. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP3 effect. There are multiple types of core production patterns that perform a reachless loss production. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation pattern is "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, as chance-up effect patterns, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and " 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later. The type and content of the chance-up effect pattern are not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and sets the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. Based on these, what kind of effect is to be performed as a variable effect is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable staging process (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is being produced (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the variation effect is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the effect pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , The production content is switched and a specific image is displayed according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the advance notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the advance notice fade effect for fading the advance notice image.

8. Operation of the Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The buffer and the like that appear in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). When receiving (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads out a predetermined variation effect image instructed by the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). When receiving (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command before the end of the fluctuation, and when the command before the end of the fluctuation includes the look-ahead effect pattern information, reads a predetermined look-ahead effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the image. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Further, even if the pre-floating effect pattern information is not included in the command before the end of the fluctuation, if the advance notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the advance notice fade effect for fading the advance notice image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When receiving (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variation effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and reads the predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a to end this process.

9. Operation of the movable accessory (board movable body 15) FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the operation by the movable accessory (board movable body 15).
The effect control microcomputer 91 movably controls the board movable body 15 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like. The home position of the movable board 15 is in the position shown in FIG. On the other hand, the board movable body 15 is in the deployed position at the position shown in FIG. 46. The staging control microcomputer 91 can control the movable board 15 from the home position to the deployed position. The board movable body 15 is basically at the home position, and is movably controlled to the deployed position by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate according to the display effect (game effect). When the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the deployed position, it is arranged on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (on the front side of the display screen 7a), in other words, the display screen 7a is viewed from the player's point of view. It is arranged at a position that overlaps with the predetermined area of. Therefore, in this case, the board movable body 15 is in a state of blocking the predetermined area of the display screen 7a from the viewpoint of the player. Further, the board movable body 15 is provided with a star-shaped hole portion 15a in the central portion. Therefore, when the board movable body 15 is in the deployed position, a part of the area of the display screen 7a can be seen from the hole portion 15a. Further, when the board movable body 15 is in the home position, the board movable body 15 is in a position that does not overlap with the display screen 7a.

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of the present embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect on the example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode will also be described.
As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when there is no particular need in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) is omitted.

The button image operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. This button image operation effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the button image operation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect to be displayed on 7a.

[Button image operation effect A]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the button image operation effect A. In the button image operation effect A, first, the first button image display shown in FIG. 47 (A) is executed. This first button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative pattern. Here, the first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested images (hold icon) 9C move to the left (in the direction of the black arrow) and frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed. A part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the staging pattern. In the present specification, "overlapping images" means that they appear to overlap from the viewpoint of the player, and it does not matter whether or not they actually overlap. For example, when at least a part of one image displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing due to the other image, it can be said that the images overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (C), the third button image BI3 is displayed in the lower right direction of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 and the second button image BI2 are displayed. .. Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (D), with the first button image BI1, the second button image BI2, and the third button image BI3 displayed, the fourth button image is in the upper right direction of the first button image BI1. BI4 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (E), in a state where the first button image BI1, the second button image BI2, the third button image BI3, and the fourth button image BI4 are displayed, the lower left of the first button image BI1. The fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (F), with the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 displayed, the characters "press !!!!" to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. An image (button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed.

[Button image operation effect B]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the button image operation effect B. The button image operation effect B differs from the button image operation effect A of FIG. 47 in the timing at which the second to fourth button images disappear from the display screen 7a. The first button image display of FIG. 48 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 47 (A). That is, the first button image BI1 is displayed, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B, and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C move to the left and frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1. A part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the staging pattern. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a lapse of a predetermined second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the third button image BI3 is displayed in the lower right direction of the first button image BI1 almost at the same time that the second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a lapse of a predetermined second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the fourth button image BI4 is displayed in the upper right direction of the first button image BI1 almost at the same time that the third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The fourth button image BI4 disappears from the display screen 7a after a lapse of a predetermined second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the lower left direction of the first button image BI1 almost at the same time that the fourth button image BI4 disappears from the display screen 7a. The fifth button image BI5 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (F), with the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 displayed, the button operation promotion image OPI of "press !!!!" and the timer bar TBI are displayed. To. The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is longer than the display time of the second to fourth button images.

[Button image operation effect C]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the button image operation effect C. The button image operation effect C is different from the button image operation effect B of FIG. 48 in that the effect of moving the button image is mainly performed. In the first button image display of FIG. 49 (A), the first button image BI1 is displayed as in FIG. 48 (A), but the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested image (the hold) are displayed. Icon) 9C does not move and is displayed as it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (B), the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1 and is displayed at an angle with respect to the first button image BI1. A part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the staging pattern. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a lapse of a predetermined second, and a light ball image appears at the same position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (C), the light ball image moves in the lower right direction of the first button image, the light ball image disappears at that position, and the third button image BI3 is displayed. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1 and is displayed at an angle with respect to the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a lapse of a predetermined second, and a light ball image appears at the same position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), the light ball image moves to the right of the first button image, the light ball image disappears at that position, and the fourth button image BI4 is displayed. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (E), the fourth button image BI4 and the first button image BI1 both move in the lower left direction and then stop. After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (F), with the first button image BI1 and the fourth button image BI4 displayed, the button operation promotion image OPI of "press !!!!" and the timer bar TBI are displayed. To. The timer bar TBI overlaps a part of the fourth button image BI4. The display time of the fourth button image BI4 is longer than the display time of the second and third button images.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the button image operation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the first button image BI1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the second button image is on the upper left of the first button image BI1. A second effect in which BI2 is displayed, and a second effect in which the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed after the first effect. You can perform directing and. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, with the first effect in which the first button image BI1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a and the second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1. After the first effect, with the first button image BI1 displayed, the second effect in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed to the left of the first button image BI1 can be executed. According to this configuration, the button images appear one after another at different positions on the display screen 7a, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect in which the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. , The second button image BI2 is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, in the second effect in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed to the left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is Do not show. According to this configuration, it is possible to produce an effect in which the button image disappeared from the display screen 7a reappears at a different position on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect in which the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is the display time of the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. Longer than the display time. again,
As shown in FIG. 49, when the first button image BI1 is displayed, the display time of the fourth button image BI4 in the second effect in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed on the right side of the first button image BI1 is , The display time of the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1 in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed is longer than the display time of the second button image BI2. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a change to the display time of the button image that appears in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the second button image BI2 and the fifth button image BI5 are larger than the first button image BI1, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 and the fourth button image BI4 are larger than the first button image BI1, respectively. According to this configuration, the player can be surprised when the button image that appears in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed is displayed, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 is displayed at an angle with respect to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of dynamism to the display of the second button image BI2 that appears in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the second button image BI2 may be displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol. According to this configuration, the second button image BI2 that appears in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed seems to be located in the back of the decorative image, and can produce a sense of depth in the display. Can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the button operation promotion image OPI of "press !!!!" is displayed while the fifth button image BI5 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the button operation promotion image OPI is displayed while the fourth button image BI4 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the button operation promotion image OPI appears together with the button image that appears in the state where the first button image BI1 is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension, and to improve the interest. be able to.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the button image operation effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the effect using the button image showing the appearance of the effect button 63 is performed. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using an image showing the appearance of an operation unit of a type other than the effect button 63. For example, instead of the button image, an image showing the appearance of the sword member 64 or the sword button 65 may be used to perform the same effect. Further, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a steering wheel image, a lever image, and a trigger image may be used. In addition to the image of the operation unit, any image such as a specific character, figure, symbol, or character image may be used.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the button image operation effects A to C shown in FIGS. 47 to 49 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. For example, in the button image operation effect A, the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are framed out from the display screen 7a, but they do not have to be framed out as in the button image operation effect C. Further, the button image operation effects A to C may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, or may be added with other effect contents. Further, the button image operation effects A to C are not limited to the arrangement positions of FIGS. 47 to 49 with respect to the positions of the button image, the decorative symbol, and the hold icon, and may be any position.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, five button images (first to fifth button images) have appeared in FIGS. 47 and 48, and four button images (first to fourth button images) have appeared in FIG. 49. However, the number of button images appearing in the button image operation effect may be 1 to 3 or 6 or more.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image showing the appearance of the operating means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image showing the appearance of the operating means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image showing the appearance of the operating means.
A first in which the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means, and the second image is displayed at a second position away from the first image in the first direction. After the first effect and the first effect, the third image is displayed at a third position away from the first image in the second direction in a state where the first image is displayed. A game machine characterized by being able to perform the second production.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second image is not displayed in the second effect.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the display time of the third image in the second effect is longer than the display time of the second image in the first effect.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second image and the third image are larger than the first image, respectively.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the second image is displayed at an angle with respect to the first image.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the second image may be displayed overlapping with a decorative pattern.
◇ [Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-6.
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image for urging the player to operate the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a state where the third image is displayed at the third position of the display means, the fourth image is displayed at the fourth position.

The operation unit partial enlarged display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. This operation unit partial enlarged display effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern, a reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit partial enlarged display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect to be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation part enlarged display effect A]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit partially enlarged display effect A. In the operation unit partial enlarged display effect A, first, the sword member image display of FIG. 50 (A) is executed. This sword member image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative pattern. Here, the sword member image ASI showing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center right of the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI also includes a first sword button image PSB showing the appearance of the sword button 65. That is, since the sword button 65 is provided at the end of the handle of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1), the first sword button image PSB is drawn at the end of the handle of the sword represented by the sword member image ASI. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the second sword button image SBI appears from the position of the first sword button image PSB of the sword member image ASI in the state where the sword member image ASI is displayed. The second sword button image SBI is an image showing the appearance of the sword button 65, similarly to the first sword button image PSB. In other words, the second sword button image SBI is an image representing a part of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the second sword button image SBI moves in the lower left direction while being enlarged and displayed, and stops on the left side of the sword member image ASI. As a result, the second sword button image SBI, which is larger than the sword member image ASI, is displayed in the state where the sword member image ASI is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), in the state where the sword member image ASI and the second sword button image SBI are displayed, the "press !!!" for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. A character image (button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the sword button 65 are displayed. The button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed so as to overlap with the second sword button image SBI. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI.

When the sword member 64 is operated by the player, the second sword button image SBI disappears from the display screen 7a and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position as shown in FIG. 50 (E). After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the explosion image EXI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the staging symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Operation part enlarged display production B]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit partially enlarged display effect B. In the operation unit partial enlarged display effect B, first, the first button image display of FIG. 51 (A) is executed. This first button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative pattern. Here, the first button image BI showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the second button image BB appears from the first button image BI in a state where the first button image BI is displayed. The second button image BB is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1), similarly to the first button image BI.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the second button image BB moves to the left while being enlarged and displayed, and stops in a state where a part on the left side of the second button image BB is framed out from the display screen 7a. .. As a result, in the state where the first button image BI is displayed, the second button image BB, which is larger than the sword member image ASI, is displayed although the left part is not displayed. Since both the first button image BI and the second button image BB represent the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1), the second button image BB in which a part on the left side is not displayed is the first button image BI. It is an image showing a part (a part other than the left side of an effect button 63).

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the player is urged to operate the effect button 63 while the first button image BI and the second button image BB with a part on the left side framed out are displayed. A character image (button operation promotion image) OPI for "press !!!!" and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. The button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed so as to overlap with the second button image BB. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than the first button image BI.

When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the second button image BB is framed out from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 51 (E). After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (F), the staging symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Operation part enlarged display effect C]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit partially enlarged display effect C. In the operation unit partial enlarged display effect C, first, the select button image display shown in FIG. 52 (A) is executed. This select button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative pattern. Here, the select button image SSI showing the appearance of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower right of the display screen 7a. The select button image SSI is composed of four button images corresponding to the four buttons (left button, right button, up button, and down button) constituting the select button 68 (FIG. 1). Here, among the select button image SSIs, the image corresponding to the left button of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is referred to as "first left button image LI", and the image corresponding to the right button is referred to as "first right button image RI". ". In addition to the select button image SSI, a plurality of panel image PNs are displayed on the display screen 7a. A predetermined image (for example, a character image) may be drawn on each panel of the panel image PN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52B, the second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI are displayed below the display screen 7a in a state where the select button image SSI is displayed. The second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI represent the appearance of the left button and the right button in the select button image SSI, similarly to the first left button image LI and the first right button image RI. .. The second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI are larger than the select button image SSI. The second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI are images representing a part (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the player is urged to operate the effect button 63 while the select button image SSI, the second left button image PRI, and the second right button image PRI are displayed. The character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "press !!!!" and the timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the select button 68 are displayed. The timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI.

When the left button of the select button image SSI is operated by the player, the color of the second left button image PRI changes and is selected and enlarged in the panel image PN as shown in FIG. 52 (D). Panels are replaced. When the operation valid period of the select button 68 ends, the second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI disappear from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (F), the selected panel image PN is enlarged and displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the operation unit partial enlarged display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the second sword button representing a part of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB) in the state where the sword member image ASI is displayed. The effect of displaying the image SBI is feasible. Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), in a state where the first button image BI is displayed, the second button image BB representing a part of the first button image BI (a portion other than the left side of the effect button 63) is displayed. The effect to be performed is feasible. Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, the second left button image PRI and the second right button image representing a part (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI in the state where the select button image SSI is displayed. The effect of displaying the PRI is feasible. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50C, the second sword button image SBI representing a part of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB) is larger than the sword member image ASI. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the second button image BB representing a part of the first button image BI (a portion other than the left side of the effect button 63) is larger than the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, the second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI representing a part (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI are larger than the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI. Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible for the player to impress a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50F, the display time of the second sword button image SBI is shorter than the display time of the sword member image ASI. Further, as shown in FIGS. 51A to 51F, the display time of the second button image BB is shorter than the display time of the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (F), the display time of the second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI is shorter than the display time of the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible for the player to impress a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword member 64 can execute the first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 and the second operation of pushing the sword button 65. As shown in FIG. 50, the sword The member image ASI shows a part that moves during the first operation of the sword member 64 (sword member pushing operation), and the second sword button image SBI shows the second operation of the sword member 64 (sword button pressing operation). It shows the part that sometimes moves. Further, the select button 68 can execute the first operation of pressing the up button and the down button and the second operation of pressing the left button and the right button. As shown in FIG. 52, the select button image SSI has the select button image SSI. The part that is movable during the first operation (up / down button pressing operation) of the select button 68 is shown, and the second left button image PRI and the second right button image PRI are the second operation of the select button 68 (left / right button pressing operation). Indicates a part that can be moved during operation). According to these configurations, it is possible for the player to impress a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation unit partial enlarged display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, a first operation unit image showing the appearance of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, or the select button 68, and a second operation unit image representing a part of the operation unit image. The production is performed using the operation unit image of. However, the gaming machine 1 may use an image showing the appearance of an operation unit of a type other than the above as the first operation unit image. For example, the first operation unit image may be an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a steering wheel image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the operation unit partial enlarged display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the operation unit partial enlarged display effects A to C may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, or may be added with other effect contents. Further, the operation unit partial enlarged display effects A to C are not limited to the arrangement positions of FIGS. 50 to 52 with respect to the positions of the operation unit image, the decorative symbol, and the hold icon, and may be any position.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image showing the appearance of the operating means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing a part of the operating means displayed in the first image.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a first effect in which the second image is displayed at a second position while the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means. ..
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the second image is larger than the first image.
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image showing the operation acceptance period of the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the third image is displayed at a third position closer to the second position than the first position of the display means.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the display time of the second image is shorter than the display time of the first image.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4.
The operating means can execute the first operation and the second operation having different operation methods.
The first image shows a portion of the operating means that is movable during the first operation.
The second image is a gaming machine characterized in that the operating means shows a portion that is movable during the second operation.

The operation unit image protrusion movement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. This operation unit image overhanging movement effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern, a reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image protrusion movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect to be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation part image overhang movement effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protruding movement effect A. In the operation unit image protrusion movement effect A, first, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 53 (A) is executed. This hold icon movement effect is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested images (hold icon) 9C move to the left and are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, the enlargement button image appearance effect of FIG. 53 (B) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a in an enlarged state. Since the button image BB is enlarged and displayed, the portion of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 is framed out (protruded) from the display screen 7a. In other words, a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button protrude from the display screen 7a. A part of the displayed button image BB overlaps with the staging pattern.

Next, the left movement effect of the button image shown in FIG. 53 (C) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB is reduced and displayed from the state of FIG. 53 (B) and moves to the left, and as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the left end of the button image BB is a display screen. The frame is out from 7a. Next, the button image right movement effect of FIG. 53 (D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB moves to the right from the state of FIG. 53 (C), and as shown in FIG. 53 (D), the right end of the button image BB is framed out from the display screen 7a. It becomes a state. In other words, a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the portion corresponding to the right end portion of the effect button protrudes from the display screen 7a.

Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 53 (E) is executed. Specifically, in the button image BB, the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB at the same position as in FIG. 53 (B). The timer of this timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect of FIG. 53 (F) is executed. Specifically, with the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB, the character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "press !!!!" for prompting the player to operate the staging button 63, and A timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation part image overhang movement effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protruding movement effect B. The operation unit image protrusion movement effect B is different from the operation unit image protrusion movement effect A in FIG. 53 mainly in the movement mode of the button image BB. The hold icon movement effect of FIG. 54 (A) is almost the same as that of FIG. 53 (A). Here, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested images (hold icon) 9C move downward and frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, the reverse button image appearance effect of FIG. 54 (B) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where the button image BB is upside down and enlarged. Since the button image BB whose top and bottom are inverted is enlarged and displayed, both left and right ends are framed out from the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps with the staging pattern.

Next, the reverse button image left movement effect of FIG. 54 (C) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB moves to the left as it is from the state of FIG. 53 (B) inverted upside down, and as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the right side of the effect button 63 in the button image BB. The part corresponding to is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, the button image rotation effect of FIG. 54 (D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB is rotated clockwise (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 54 (C), which is vertically inverted, and is not inverted vertically via the state shown in FIG. 54 (D). The state is 54 (E). After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (E), the timer display effect is executed. Specifically, the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB. The timer of this timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect of FIG. 54 (F) is executed. Specifically, with the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB, the character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "press !!!!" for prompting the player to operate the staging button 63, and A timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation part image protrusion movement effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protruding movement effect C. The hold icon movement effect of FIG. 55 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 53 (A). Next, the sword member image appearance effect of FIG. 55 (B) is executed. Specifically, the sword member image ASI showing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are framed out from the display screen 7a. That is, in the sword member image ASI, the portion corresponding to the tip of the sword and the tip of the handle is framed out from the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves to the left from the position shown in FIG. 55 (B).

Next, the sword member image rotation effect of FIG. 55 (C) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (C), in the sword member image ASI after moving to the left, only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the handle is framed out from the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI rotates clockwise by about 45 degrees, and the sword of the sword member image ASI stops at an angle (position) parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

Next, the sword member image movement effect of FIG. 55 (D) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (D), in the sword member image ASI after rotating clockwise, only the upper end is framed out from the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward, and only the lower end of the sword member image ASI stops in a frame-out state from the display screen 7a.

Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 55 (E) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (E), only the lower end of the sword member image ASI after moving downward is framed out from the display screen 7a. In this state, the timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of this timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect of FIG. 55 (F) is executed. Specifically, with the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB, the character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "press !!!!" for prompting the player to operate the staging button 63, and A timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation part image overhang movement effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protruding movement effect D. The shape of the sword member image ASI of the operation unit image overhanging movement effect D is mainly different from that of the operation unit image overhanging movement effect C of FIG. 55. The sword member 64 has a shape in which the tip portion of the sword is embedded in the outer frame of the gaming machine 1 (FIG. 1). The sword member image ASI of FIG. 55 does not include an image showing the sword tip portion according to the actual shape of the sword member 64. On the other hand, the sword member image ASI of FIG. 56 is an image of the entire sword including the sword tip portion according to the ideological shape of the sword member 64. As shown in FIG. 56 (A), reach occurs in the staging symbol variation staging. Here, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested images (hold icon) 9C do not move.

Next, the enlarged sword member image appearance effect of FIG. 56 (B) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (B), the sword member image ASI is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 55 (B), the sword member image ASI is enlarged and the shape changes so as to represent a state in which the sword is rotating about the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis (sword lateral rotation). Direction). In other words, the shape of the sword member image ASI changes so as to represent a state in which the sword member 64 is rotating about the longitudinal direction as a rotation axis. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are framed out from the display screen 7a. That is, in the sword member image ASI, the portion corresponding to the tip of the sword and the tip of the handle is framed out from the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves to the left from the position shown in FIG. 55 (B).

Next, the sword member image rotation effect of FIG. 56 (C) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (C), in the sword member image ASI after moving to the left, only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the handle is framed out from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 55 (C), the sword member image ASI is reduced and displayed, and the sword lateral rotation effect continues. Further, an image of the tip of the sword is displayed on the lower end side of the sword member image ASI. The sword member image ASI rotates clockwise by about 45 degrees, and stops at an angle (position) in which the sword of the sword member image ASI is parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

Next, the sword member image movement effect shown in FIG. 56 (D) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (D), in the sword member image ASI after rotating clockwise, only the upper end is framed out from the display screen 7a, and the sword lateral rotation effect continues. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward, and only the lower end of the sword member image ASI stops in a frame-out state from the display screen 7a. The sideways rotation of the sword also stops.

Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 56 (E) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (E), in the sword member image ASI, only the lower end is framed out from the display screen 7a. In this state, the timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of this timer image TN is a countdown method, and when the timer value becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect of FIG. 56 (F) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55 (F), with the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB, the button operation promotion image OPI of "press !!!!" and the timer bar TBI showing the operation validity period of the effect button 63. Is displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the operation unit image overhanging movement effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (B), the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) protrude from the display screen 7a. As shown in the first display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first display, as shown in FIGS. 53 (C) and 54 (C), among the button image BB, A second display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed so that only the portion corresponding to one end of the effect button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a, and after the second display, FIG. 53 ( As shown in D) and FIG. 54 (E), a part of the button image BB is formed so that only the portion of the button image BB corresponding to the other end of the effect button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a. The third display to be displayed and the third display to be displayed are configured to be feasible. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 (B) and 56 (B), the portions corresponding to the upper and lower ends of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) protrude from the display screen 7a. After the first display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed on the display screen 7a and the first display, FIGS. 55 (C) (D) and 56 (C) (D) are shown. As described above, the second display and the second display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed so that only the portion of the sword member image ASI corresponding to the upper end portion of the sword member 64 protrudes from the display screen 7a. After the display of 2, as shown in FIGS. 55 (E) and 55 (E), only the portion of the sword member image ASI corresponding to the lower end portion of the sword member 64 is in a state of protruding from the display screen 7a. As described above, the third display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed and the like are configured to be feasible. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53C, the button image is such that the portion of the button image BB corresponding to the left end portion of the effect button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a. In the second display in which a part of the BB is displayed, a part of the button image BB is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 53 (D), the right side of the effect button 63 in the button image BB. In the third display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the portion corresponding to the end portion protrudes from the display screen 7a, the part of the button image BB is displayed at the right end of the display screen 7a. That is, a part of the button image BB of the third display is displayed at a position separated from the position displayed in the second display in the right direction. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the second display shown in FIGS. 55 (C) (D) and 56 (C) (D) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the upper end of the display screen 7a. In the third display shown in FIGS. 55 (E) and 55 (E), a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a. That is, a part of the sword member image ASI of the third display is displayed at a position separated downward from the position displayed in the second display. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with a novel effect, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the button image BB of the second display shown in FIG. 53 (C) is displayed in a smaller size than a part of the button image BB of the first display shown in FIG. 55 (B). ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56B, the shape of the sword member image ASI changes so as to represent a state in which the sword member 64 is rotating with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer image TN is displayed on the display screen 7a in the third display. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 (E) and 54 (E), the timer image TN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button image BB. Further, as shown in FIGS. 55 (E) and 56 (E), the timer image TN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the sword member image ASI. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation unit image protruding movement effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect using the button image BB showing the appearance of the effect button 63 is performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect using the sword member image ASI showing the appearance of the sword member 64 is performed. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using an image showing the appearance of an operation unit of a type other than the effect button 63 and the sword member 64. Further, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a steering wheel image, a lever image, and a trigger image may be used. In addition to the image of the operation unit, any image such as a specific character, figure, symbol, or character image may be used.

[Modification 2]
The shape of the button image BB shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 may be changed so as to represent a state in which the effect button 63 is vertically rotated or horizontally rotated. Similar to the sword member image ASI of FIG. 56, the sword member image ASI shown in FIG. 55 has a sword lateral rotation effect in which the shape changes so as to represent a state in which the sword is rotating about the longitudinal direction. You may do it.

[Modification 3]
The timers of the timer images TN in FIGS. 53 to 56 are of the countdown method, but may be of the countup method. Further, the timer image TN does not have to overlap with the operation unit image such as the button image BB or the sword member image ASI.

[Modification example 4]
The display contents of the operation unit image protrusion movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 53 to 56 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the operation unit image protrusion movement effects A to D may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, or may be added with other effect contents. Further, the operation unit image protrusion movement effects A to D are not limited to FIGS. 53 to 56 with respect to the position and movement direction of the operation unit image, the decorative symbol, and the hold icon, and may be any position or movement direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image showing the appearance of the operating means.
A first display in which a part of the first image is displayed on the display means so that portions of the first image corresponding to both ends of the operation means protrude from the display means. After the first display, a part of the first image is formed so that only the portion of the first image corresponding to one end of the operating means protrudes from the display means. After the second display to be displayed and the second display, only the portion of the first image corresponding to the other end of the operating means is in a state of protruding from the display means. A gaming machine characterized in that a third display in which a part of the first image is displayed and a third display can be executed.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1.
In the second display, a part of the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the third display, a part of the first image is displayed at a second position separated from the first position in a first direction.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the first image displayed in the second display is displayed in a smaller size than a part of the first image displayed in the first display.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3.
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the first image displayed in the first display changes its shape so as to represent a state in which the operating means is rotated.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that a timer image is displayed on the display means in the third display.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the third display, the timer image is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image.

The operation unit image overhang display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. This operation unit image overhang display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image overhang display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. This is a display effect to be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation unit image overhang display effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image overhang display effect A. In the operation unit image overhang display effect A, first, the hold icon movement effect of FIG. 57 (A) is executed. This hold icon movement effect is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested images (hold icon) 9C move to the right and are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), a button image BB showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the button image BB, the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are framed out (protruded) from the display screen 7a. In other words, a part of the button image BB is displayed so that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button protrude from the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps with the staging pattern.

Next, the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 57 (D) is executed. Specifically, in order to encourage the player to operate the effect button 63 in a state where the button image BB is enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are framed out from the display screen 7a. The character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "Press !!!!" and the timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed on the button image BB.

[Operation unit image overhang display effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image overhang display effect B. The operation unit image overhang display effect B has a different frame-out range from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged and displayed as compared with the operation unit image overhang display effect A of FIG. 57. 58 (A) and 58 (B) are the same as those of FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (B).

As shown in FIG. 58 (C), the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the button image BB, not the protrusion (convex portion) of the effect button 63 but the portion corresponding to the annular receiving portion provided around the protrusion is framed out from the display screen 7a ( It sticks out). The effect button 63 includes not only the protrusion but also an annular receiving portion around the protrusion. Therefore, also in the case of FIG. 58 (C), it can be said that the portion of the button image BB corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 is framed out (protruded) from the display screen 7a. After that, the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 58 (D) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the button image BB is enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the effect button 63 are framed out from the display screen 7a, the button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed. It is displayed on the button image BB.

[Operation unit image overhang display effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image overhang display effect C. The operation unit image overhang display effect C has a different frame-out range from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged and displayed as compared with the operation unit image overhang display effect A of FIG. 57. 59 (A) and 59 (B) are the same as those of FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (B).

As shown in FIG. 59 (C), the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the portion of the button image BB corresponding to the left end of the effect button 63 is framed out (protruded) from the display screen 7a. After that, the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 59 (D) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the button image BB is enlarged and the portion corresponding to the left end of the effect button 63 is framed out from the display screen 7a, the button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are buttons. It is displayed on the image BB.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the operation unit image overhang display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D), 58 (D), and 59 (D), the portion of the button image BB corresponding to at least one end of the effect button 63. Is configured to be able to execute the first effect in which the timer bar TBI is displayed on the display screen 7a while a part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a so that the button image BB protrudes from the display screen 7a. ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D) and 58 (D), in the first effect, the portion of the button image BB corresponding to both ends of the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen. A part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be in a state of protruding from 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D), 58 (D), and 59 (D), in the first effect, the timer bar TBI overlaps a part of the button image BB. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the first effect, a decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button image BB. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation unit image overhang display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, the effect using the button image BB showing the appearance of the effect button 63 is performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect using the sword member image ASI showing the appearance of the sword member 64 is performed. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using an image showing the appearance of an operation unit of a type other than the effect button 63, such as the sword member 64. Further, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a steering wheel image, a lever image, and a trigger image may be used. In addition to the image of the operation unit, any image such as a specific character, figure, symbol, or character image may be used.

[Modification 2]
The shape of the button image BB shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 may be changed so as to represent a state in which the effect button 63 is vertically rotated or horizontally rotated.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the operation unit image protrusion display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the operation unit image protrusion display effects A to C may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, or may be added with other effect contents. Further, the operation unit image protrusion display effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 57 to 59 with respect to the positions and movement directions of the operation unit images, decorative symbols, and hold icons, and may be any position or movement direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image showing the appearance of the operating means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image showing an operation acceptance period of the operation means.
A part of the first image is displayed on the display means so that a portion of the first image corresponding to at least one end of the operation means protrudes from the display means. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a first effect in which the second image is displayed on the display means.
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine described in A4-1.
In the first effect, the display means is a part of the first image so that portions of the first image corresponding to both ends of the operation means protrude from the display means. A gaming machine characterized in that is displayed.
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine according to A4-1 or A4-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the second image is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image.
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of A4-1 to A4-3.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first display, a decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image.

The hold icon / operation unit image movement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. This hold icon / operation unit image movement effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect, the corresponding image data is output from the ROM 103. This is a display effect that is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon / operation unit image movement effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect A. As shown in FIG. 60 (A), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the effect button 63 (FIG. A button image BI1 showing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect symbol is started, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 60 (B) is executed. Specifically, the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C move to the right and are framed out from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 60 (C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), after the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C disappear from the display screen 7a, the button image BI1 moves from the lower left position of the display screen 7a to the right, and FIG. As shown in E), it stops at the lower right of the display screen 7a. That is, the button image BI1 moves to the position where the hold image (hold icon) 9A, 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C are displayed in FIG. 60 (A) and stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the SP reach effect is executed with the button image BI1 displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative design is reduced and displayed and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon / operation unit image movement effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect B. Compared with the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect A of FIG. 60, the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect B has the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B, the hold digestion images (the hold icon) 9C, and The operation mode of the button image BB is different.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the effect button 63 (hold icon) 63 (on the upper right side of these hold icons). A button image BI1 showing the appearance of FIG. 1) is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect symbol is started, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 61 (B) is executed. Specifically, of the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C, only the hold icon 9B moves to the right, as shown in FIG. 61 (C). Frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the button image BI1 moves downward from a position near the middle right side of the display screen 7a, and stops at the lower right of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 61 (E). .. That is, the button image BI1 moves to the position where the hold image (hold icon) 9B is displayed in FIG. 61 (A) and stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the SP reach effect is executed with the button image BI1 displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative design is reduced and displayed and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon / operation unit image movement effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect C. As shown in FIG. 62 (A), the hold display area image HA is displayed below the display screen 7a, and the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (the hold) are displayed on the hold display area image HA. Icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect symbol is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 62 (B) is executed. Specifically, the sword member image ASI showing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the sword tip portion of the sword member image ASI overlaps with the hold display area image HA and becomes invisible. That is, the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is displayed as if it was stuck in the hold display area image HA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the entire hold display area image H including the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C is moved downward and displayed. Along with frame-out from the screen 7a, the sword member image ASI moves downward from the vicinity of the left center of the display screen 7a. After that, the sword member image ASI stops at the lower left of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 62 (E). That is, as shown in FIGS. 62 (D) and 62 (E), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digest image (hold icon) 9C move downward and frame out from the display screen 7a. At the same time, the sword member image ASI moves to the position where the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C are displayed in FIG. 62 (C) and stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), the SP reach effect is executed with the sword member image ASI displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative design is reduced and displayed and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon / operation unit image movement effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect D. In FIG. 63 (A), similarly to FIG. 62 (A), the hold display area image HA is displayed below the display screen 7a, and the hold images (hold icons) 9A, 9B, and the hold images (hold icons) 9A, 9B, and the hold display area image HA are displayed on the hold display area image HA. The hold digestion image (the hold icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the reach effect by the effect symbol is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 63 (B) is executed. Specifically, the sword member image ASI showing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from above the display screen 7a and moves diagonally to the left, and at the left end of the display screen 7a, the sword member image ASI The tip of the sword is stopped and displayed in a state where it is framed out (protruded) from the display screen 7a. That is, the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is displayed as if it were stuck in the left end portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63 (C) and 63 (D), the entire hold display area image H including the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C is to the left. Move and frame out from the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the sword member image movement effect in which the sword member image ASI moves downward from the vicinity of the left center of the display screen 7a and stops is executed. That is, in the sword member image movement effect, the sword member image ASI moves to the position where the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C are displayed in FIG. 63 (B). And stop. After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), the SP reach effect is executed with the sword member image ASI displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative design is reduced and displayed and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion images (hold icon) 9C are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. , The first effect in which the button image BI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C move to the right. , As shown in FIG. 60 (D), the button image BI1 moves from the lower left to the lower right of the display screen 7a, and stops at the positions where the hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C are. The production is configured to be feasible. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion images (hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and are near the center right of the display screen 7a. The button image BI1 is displayed in the first effect, and the hold icon 9B moves to the right as shown in FIG. 61 (B), and the button image BI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (D). A second effect of moving from the vicinity of the center right of the screen 7a to the lower right and stopping at the position where the hold icon 9B was located can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion images (hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and are near the center left of the display screen 7a. The first effect in which the sword member image ASI is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the hold icons 9A and 9B, the hold icon 9C, and the sword member image ASI move downward and are held. The icons 9A and 9B and the second effect of stopping at the position where the hold icon 9C was located are configured to be feasible. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion images (hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the sword is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a. The first effect in which the member image ASI is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C move to the left and are shown in FIG. 63 (E). As described above, the sword member image ASI moves downward, and the hold icons 9A and 9B and the second effect of stopping at the position where the hold icon 9C was located are configured to be feasible. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, a hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with another image (for example, an operation unit image), and the hold icon moves and another image is displayed. Move to the position where the hold icon was. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, an operation unit image such as a button image BI1 or a sword member image ASI is displayed on the display screen 7a together with another image (for example, a hold icon). As the other image moves, the operation unit image moves to the position where the other image was. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI move after the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. To start. Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the button image BI1 starts moving after the hold icon 9B disappears from the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 62, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI move to the position where the hold icon was after the hold icon moves. Stop at that position. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the button image BI1 moves in a direction different from the moving direction of the hold icon. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon / operation unit image movement effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the operation unit image (here, the button image BI1 or the sword member image ASI), and the hold icon moves and the operation unit moves. The image moves to the position where the hold icon was. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using the hold icon and a specific image other than the operation unit image. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc. such as a character image. That is, the gaming machine 1 executes an effect that the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with a specific image other than the operation unit image, the hold icon moves, and the specific image moves to the position where the hold icon was. May be good. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the operation unit image such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI is displayed together with the hold icon on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon moves and the operation unit image is held. Move to the position where the icon was. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using the operation unit image and a specific image other than the hold icon. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc. such as a character image. That is, the gaming machine 1 executes an effect in which a specific image other than the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the operation unit image, the specific image moves, and the operation unit image moves to the position where the specific image was. You may. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 3]
The gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using the first specific image other than the hold icon and the second specific image other than the operation unit image. That is, in the gaming machine 1, the first specific image other than the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the second specific image other than the operation unit image, the first specific image moves, and the second specific image is first specified. You may execute the effect of moving to the position where the image was. The first specific image and the second specific image are images including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc. such as character images. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example 4]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the effect using the operation unit image showing the appearance of the effect button 63 or the sword member 64 is performed. However, the gaming machine 1 may use an image showing the appearance of the operation unit of a type other than the above as the operation unit image. For example, the operation unit image may be an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a steering wheel image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 5]
The display contents of the hold icon and the operation unit image movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the hold icon / operation unit image movement effects A to D may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, or may include other effect contents. Further, the hold icon / operation unit image movement effects A to D are not limited to FIGS. 60 to 63 with respect to the positions and movement directions of the operation unit images, decorative symbols, and hold icons, and may be in any position or movement direction. good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image.
A first effect in which the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means and the second image is displayed at the second position, and the first image is the first. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a second effect in which the second image moves from the second position to the first position while moving in the first direction from the position of.
◇ [Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1.
The first image is a gaming machine characterized by being a hold icon.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2 is further described.
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the operator.
The second image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an image showing the appearance of the operating means.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3.
In the second effect, the second image is displayed from the second position after the first image moves from the first position in the first direction and disappears from the display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it starts moving to a first position.
◇ [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
In the second effect, the second image is a gaming machine characterized in that it moves from the second position to the first position and then stops at the first position.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-5.
In the second effect, the second image is a gaming machine characterized in that it moves in a second direction different from the first direction.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can also be realized.
◇ [Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image.
A first effect in which the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means and the second image is displayed at the second position, and the first image is the first. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a second effect in which the second image moves from the second position to the second direction while moving in the first direction from the position of.
◇ [Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
The first image is a gaming machine characterized by being a hold icon.
◇ [Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2 is further described.
It is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the operator.
The second image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an image showing the appearance of the operating means.
◇ [Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3.
In the second effect, the second image is moved in the second direction after the first image moves from the first position in the first direction and disappears from the display means. A gaming machine characterized by starting to move.
◇ [Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4.
In the second effect, the second image is a gaming machine characterized in that it moves from the second position to the first position.
◇ [Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5.
In the second effect, the second image is a gaming machine characterized in that it moves from the second position to the first position and then stops at the first position.

The hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. This hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect can be executed during the execution of the variation effect, particularly immediately before the start of variation of the decorative symbol or immediately after the stop display. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the variation effect start command from the sub control board 90, it is executed based on the content of the variation effect start command and the hold ball number command received before that.

[Hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect A. As shown in FIG. 64 (A), the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the effect button 63 (FIG. A button image BI1 showing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) and the hold icon disappears, the first hold icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 64 (B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold image (hold icon) 9A moves diagonally upward to the right. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first hold icon 9A overlaps with the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1, and the overlapped portion becomes invisible. As described above, in the present specification, "overlapping images" means that they appear to overlap from the viewpoint of the player, and it does not matter whether or not they actually overlap. For example, when at least a part of the first hold icon 9A displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing due to the button image BI1, it can be said that the images overlap.

Next, the first hold icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 64 (C) is executed. Specifically, by moving the first hold icon 9A, the entire first hold icon 9A overlaps with the button image BI1, and the entire 1 hold icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the first hold icon appearance effect shown in FIG. 64 (D) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A appears while moving in the lower right direction from a part of the button image BI1. After that, the holding position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 64 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon that appears from a part of the button image BI1 moves in the lower right direction as it is and stops at the hold position where the hold icon 9C is arranged. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the variation effect of the decorative pattern is started.

[Hold icon / operation unit image superimposition B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect B. The hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect B is different from the superimposition effect A of FIG. 64 in that the hold image (hold icon) 9B is not displayed, the position of the button image BB, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 65 (A), the hold image (hold icon) 9A and the hold digestion image (hold icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. A button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed between the holding position and the holding position. In this state, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) and the hold icon disappears, the first hold icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 65 (B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold image (hold icon) 9A moves to the right. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapped portion becomes invisible.

Next, the first hold icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. Specifically, by moving the first hold icon 9A to the right, the entire first hold icon 9A overlaps with the button image BI1, and the entire 1 hold icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the first hold icon appearance effect shown in FIG. 65 (D) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A appears while moving to the right from the right side of the button image BI1. That is, the first hold icon 9A appears from the side opposite to the position (left side of the button image BI1) before being hidden by the button image BI1 (right side of the button image BI1). After that, the holding position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 65 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon that appears from the right end of the button image BI1 moves to the right as it is and stops at the hold position where the hold icon is arranged. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the variation effect of the decorative pattern is started.

[Hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect C. In the hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect C, the hold icon 9C is not displayed, and the button image BB is in the hold position.

As shown in FIG. 66 (A), the hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed below the display screen 7a. In this state, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the first hold icon movement start effect shown in FIG. 66 (B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold image (hold icon) 9A moves to the right. That is, it moves toward the button image BI1. The first hold icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapped portion becomes invisible.

Next, the first hold icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 66 (C) is executed. Specifically, by moving the first hold icon 9A to the right, the entire first hold icon 9A overlaps with the button image BI1, and the entire 1 hold icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the button image light emitting effect shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BI1 emits light in a specific color in order to show that the state is equivalent to the case where the hold icon is located at the hold position. This button image light emitting effect is equivalent to the hold position movement completion effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the variation effect of the decorative pattern is started.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect in which the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the position of the first hold icon 9A is the position of the button image BI1. A second effect that moves toward the button image BI1 and overlaps with the button image BI1 so that it cannot be seen can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the second effect in which the first hold icon 9A overlaps with the button image BI1 and becomes invisible, the first hold icon 9A is displayed from the button image BI1. It is configured so that the third effect that appears can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the third effect in which the first hold icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first hold icon 9A is the first hold icon before moving in the button image BI1. It is configured to appear from the side (right side) opposite to the side (left side) facing the position where 9A was. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the third effect in which the first hold icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first hold icon 9A stops at the hold position. It is configured so that the effects of 4 can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the hold icon overlaps with another image (here, the button image BI1) to perform an effect of being invisible, thereby improving the interest. be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, another image (here, the hold icon) moves toward the button image BI1, and the other image appears to overlap the button image BI1. Since the production that disappears is executed, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect in which the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A moves toward the position of the button image BI1. However, a second effect that overlaps with the button image BI1 and disappears at the position of the button image BI1 can be executed. However, in the game machine 1, a specific image other than the hold icon 9A is displayed together with the operation unit image (here, the button image BI1), the specific image moves toward the position of the operation unit image, and the operation unit image You may perform an effect that overlaps with the operation unit image at the position and becomes invisible. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc. such as a character image. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect in which the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A moves toward the position of the button image BI1. However, a second effect that overlaps with the button image BI1 and disappears at the position of the button image BI1 can be executed. However, in the gaming machine 1, the first hold icon 9A is displayed together with a specific image other than the operation unit image, the first hold icon 9A moves toward the position of the specific image, and is specific at the position of the specific image. You may perform an effect that overlaps with the image and disappears. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc. such as a character image. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the button image BI1 is shown as an example of the operation unit image in FIGS. 64 to 66, but the operation unit image other than the button image may be used. The operation unit image may be, for example, a sword member image, a sword button image, or a select button image.

[Modification example 4]
The display contents of the hold icon and the operation unit image superimposition effects A to C shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effects A to C may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, or may have other effect contents added. Further, the hold icon / operation unit image superimposition effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 64 to 66 with respect to the positions and movement directions of the operation unit images, decorative symbols, and hold icons, and may be at any position or movement direction. good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image.
A first effect in which the first image is displayed at the first position of the display means and the second image is displayed at the second position, and the first image is the first. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a second effect of moving from the position of 1 to the second position, and at the second position, overlapping with the second image and disappearing.
◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1 is further described.
A gaming machine characterized in that after the second effect, a third effect in which the first image appears from the second image can be executed.
◇ [Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first image of the third effect appears from a side opposite to the side facing the first position in the second image.
◇ [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3 is further described.
A gaming machine characterized in that after the third effect, a fourth effect in which the first image stops at a third position can be executed.
◇ [Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-4.
The first image is a gaming machine characterized by being a hold icon.
◇ [Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-5 is further described.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the operator
The second image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an image showing the appearance of the operating means.

The hold icon hiding effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. This hold icon non-display effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. Specifically, it can be displayed as one of the look-ahead effects in which the image control microcomputer 101 receives a command before the end of fluctuation from the sub-control board 90 and executes it.

[Hold icon non-display effect A]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect A. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), four panel image PNs are displayed in the area where the hold image (hold icon) 9A is displayed below the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A is displayed on each of the four panel image PNs. Here, since there are three hold icons 9A, the hold icons 9A are displayed in the first to third panel image PNs from the right in the display area of the hold icon 9A, respectively, and are displayed in the leftmost panel image PN. The hold icon 9A is not displayed. Hereinafter, in the panel represented by the panel image PN, the surface on the side where the hold icon 9A is displayed is referred to as "front surface", and the surface on the opposite side is also referred to as "back surface". In FIG. 67A, the hold icon 9C is also displayed in another panel image different from the panel image PN.

At a specific timing during the fluctuation, the panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 67 (B) is executed. Specifically, in any panel image PN among the panel image PNs on which the hold icon 9A is displayed (here, the first to third panel image PNs from the right among the four panel image PNs), the panel The image changes so that is in a horizontally rotated state. Then, the hold icon hiding effect shown in FIG. 67 (C) is executed. Specifically, the panel image PN whose image is changed so that the panel is rotated horizontally is an image in which the panel is turned face down. That is, the panel image PN is an image in which the surface (back surface) of the panel surface opposite to the side on which the hold icon 9A is displayed is displayed. As a result, the hold icon 9A displayed on the panel image PN is hidden. That is, in the display area of the hold icon 9A on the display screen 7a, the hold icon is visible when the front image is displayed, and the hold icon disappears when the back image is displayed.

Next, the panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 68 (D) is executed. Specifically, the panel image PN in which the hold icon 9A is hidden changes its image so that the horizontal rotation of the panel continues as it is, goes around, and again, the surface on the side where the hold icon 9A is displayed. The image shows (front surface). At this time, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the hold icon 9A is changing (holding change). In FIG. 68 (F), a shift effect is shown. After the final display of the decorative symbol, the hold icon 9A displayed on each panel image PN moves to the right panel image PN one by one. The hold icon 9A displayed on the rightmost panel image PN moves to the panel image on which the hold is displayed and is displayed on that panel.

[Hold icon non-display effect B]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect B. The hold icon non-display effect B is different from the non-display effect A of FIG. 67 in that the frame area image HA is displayed around the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 68 (A), the frame area image HA is displayed in the area where the hold image (hold icon) 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. Of the frame area image HA, four panel image PNs are displayed in the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed. Of the frame area image HA, one panel image is displayed in the area where the hold icon 9C is displayed. In other words, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is divided into four by the frame area image HA. The hold icon 9A is displayed on each of the four panel image PNs arranged in the area partitioned by the frame area image HA. In the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A is displayed in the first to third panel image PNs from the right, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the leftmost panel image PN. Since the operation of each panel image PN is the same as that of the non-display effect A of FIG. 67, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Hold icon non-display effect C]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect C. The hold icon non-display effect C is different from the non-display effect A of FIG. 67 in that the pupil frame image EF is displayed instead of the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 69 (A), four pupil frame image EFs are displayed in the area where the hold image (hold icon) 9A is displayed below the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A is displayed inside the pupil frame image EF. The hold icon 9A displayed inside the pupil frame image EF is displayed so as to be the black eye portion of the pupil. Here, since there are three hold icons 9A, the hold icons 9A are displayed in the first to third pupil frame image EFs from the right in the display area of the hold icon 9A, and the leftmost pupil frame image is displayed. The hold icon 9A is not displayed on the EF. Hereinafter, the state in which the eyelids represented by the pupil frame image EF are open and the hold icon 9A is displayed is called the "eyelid open state", and the state in which the eyelids are closed and the hold icon 9A is invisible is also called the "eyelid closed state". .. Here, the hold icon 9C is also displayed in another pupil frame image different from the pupil frame image EF.

The eyelid closing effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) is executed at a specific timing during the fluctuation. Specifically, any pupil frame image among the pupil frame images EF on which the hold icon 9A is displayed (here, the first to third pupil frame images EF from the right among the four pupil frame image EFs). In the EF, the image changes so that the eyelid image appears and the eyes are closed. Then, the hold icon hiding effect shown in FIG. 69 (C) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF in which the image is changed so as to close the eyes is an image in a state in which the eyes are completely closed by the eyelids (eyelid closed state). That is, the pupil frame image EF is an image in which the hold icon 9A of the black eye portion is completely hidden by the eyelids. As a result, the hold icon 9A displayed on the pupil frame image EF is hidden.

Next, the eyelid opening effect shown in FIG. 69 (D) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF in a state in which the eyes are completely closed by the eyelids (eyelid closed state) changes the image so that the eyelids are opened again. From the closed eyelid state to the open eyelid state, the hold icon 9A changes (hold change) as shown in FIG. 69 (E). In FIG. 69 (F), a shift effect is shown. After the final display of the decorative pattern, the hold icon 9A displayed on each pupil frame image EF moves to the right pupil frame image EF one by one. The hold icon 9A displayed on the rightmost pupil frame image EF moves to the pupil frame image on which the hold is displayed, and is displayed as a black eye portion of the pupil frame image.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon hiding effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, when the panel image PN is displaying the surface of the panel in the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A can be displayed. When the back side of the panel is displayed, the hold icon 9A disappears. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, in the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A can be displayed when the pupil frame image EF is in the eyelid open state, and the hold icon 9A cannot be seen when the eyelid frame image EF is in the eyelid closed state. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, when the hold icon 9A is displayed when the panel image PN is displaying the surface of the panel, the hold icon 9A is the panel. The image PN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the surface of the panel. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, when the hold icon 9A is displayed when the pupil frame image EF is in the eyelid open state, the hold icon 9A overlaps a part (white eye portion) of the pupil frame image EF. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the panel image PN representing the front surface of the panel, and then the panel image PN is switched to the display on the back surface of the panel. It is possible to execute the first effect in which the hold icon 9A disappears. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the pupil frame image EF showing the eyelid open state, and then the pupil frame image EF is switched to the eyelid closed state display, and the hold icon 9A disappears. It is possible to carry out the production of. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, after the first effect in which the hold icon 9A disappears, the panel image PN switches from the back surface of the panel to the front surface display, and the hold icon 9A disappears. It is possible to execute the second effect in which the icon 9A is displayed again. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, after the first effect in which the hold icon 9A disappears, the pupil frame image EF switches from the closed eyelid state to the open eyelid state display, and the invisible hold icon 9A is displayed again. The second effect can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, when the invisible hold icon 9A is displayed again, the hold icon 9A changes from the state before it disappears (hold change). Will be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, each display area of the hold icon 9A is partitioned by the frame area image HA. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon hiding effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 69, the frame area image HA is not displayed, but the frame area image HA may be displayed. Further, the shutter may be opened and closed instead of the eyelids.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the hold icon non-display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the hold icon non-display effects A to C may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, or may be added with other effect contents. Further, the hold icon non-display effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 67 to 69 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the decorative symbols and the hold icons, and may be any position and moving direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons.
One of the first display and the second display can be displayed in each display area where each hold icon is displayed.
The hold icon can be displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the hold icon disappears in the display area where the second display is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1.
When the hold icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first display. ..
◇ [Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2.
After the hold icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, the display in the display area is switched from the first display to the second display, and the hold icon disappears. A gaming machine characterized by being able to perform the production of 1.
◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3.
After the first effect, the display of the display area is switched from the second display to the first display, and the second effect in which the invisible hold icon is displayed again can be executed. A game machine to be.
◇ [Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4.
In the second effect, the game machine is characterized in that an effect that changes from the state before the hold icon that is displayed again is executed.
◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the display areas is divided by a frame image.

The operation count effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. This operation count effect is performed in parallel with the variation effect of the decorative pattern. Of course, this includes during execution such as during reach production (super reach production).

[Operation count production A]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect A.
First, in the operation count effect A, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. Further, at the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG that moves downward in the sword move effect stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial stage), "5" is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. Then, the countdown is displayed in the order of "5"->"4"->"3"->"2"->"1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), the counting effect (final stage) is executed. In the count production (final stage), "0" is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. It is a display following "1" of the above-mentioned countdown display.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), the button pressing instruction effect is executed. In the button pressing instruction effect, an image instructing the pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, the text image TG "Press!" Is displayed together with the arrow image YG instructing the button image BG to be pressed.

[Operation count production B (success)]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect B (success).
First, in the operation count effect B (success), as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. Further, at the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG, which moves downward in the sword move effect, moves to the left while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial stage), "5" is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG indicating the sword button 65. Then, a countdown is displayed in the button image BG portion in the order of "5"-> "4"-> "3"-> "2"-> "1". At this time, the characters "Wait ..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), the count effect (final stage) is executed. In the count production (final stage), "0" is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. It is a display following "1" of the above-mentioned countdown display. Also at this time, the characters "Wait ..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the button pressing instruction effect is executed. In the button pressing instruction effect, an image instructing the pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, the text image TG "Press!" Is displayed together with the arrow image YG instructing the button image BG to be pressed.

[Operation count effect B (failure)]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the operation count effect B (failure).
First, in the operation count effect B (failure), as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. Further, at the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG, which moves downward in the sword move effect, moves to the left while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the count effect (initial) is executed. In the count effect (initial stage), "5" is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG indicating the sword button 65. Then, a countdown is displayed in the part of the button image BG, such as "5" → "4". At this time, the characters "Wait ..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.
The effects of FIGS. 72 (A) to 72 (D) are the same as the operation count effect B (success) shown in FIG. 71.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), the count effect (medium term) is executed. In the count effect (mid-term), "3" is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. It is a display following "4" of the above-mentioned countdown display. Also at this time, the characters "Wait ..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the fluctuation continuation effect is executed. In the fluctuation continuation effect, the sword image KG is not displayed, and the effect is the same as the variation start effect shown in FIG. 72 (A). That is, the countdown display is interrupted at "3", and an effect similar to the fluctuation start effect is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect in this embodiment is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the countdown is displayed by using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64. When the countdown display becomes "0", the button pressing instruction effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 70 (E) and 71 (E). According to this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 can be expected by displaying the countdown using a part of the sword image KG, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the countdown is displayed on the button image BG of the sword image KG. When the countdown display becomes "0", the button pressing instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (E). According to this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 can be expected by counting down on the button image BG, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the countdown is displayed on the button image BG of the sword image KG, and "Wait ..." is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. Character is displayed. According to this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 can be expected, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the countdown display superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG disappears in the middle, the fluctuation continuation effect as shown in FIG. 72 (E) is produced. Is performed, and the button pressing instruction effect as shown in FIG. 71 (E) is not performed. According to this configuration, the game can be broadened and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG, which moves downward in the sword move effect, moves to the left while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

[Modification example]
A modified example of this embodiment is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the countdown is displayed by using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64. When the countdown display becomes "0", the button pressing instruction effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 70 (E) and 71 (E), but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the button pressing instruction effect may be executed even if the countdown display does not become "0".
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the countdown is displayed by using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the countdown may be used instead of the countdown.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the countdown is displayed by using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, it does not have to be a display for counting, and a time display such as "remaining 5 seconds" may be performed at a certain timing.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B5-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an image of the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of an image of the operating means is used to display a time until the operating means can be operated.
[Aspect B5-2]
A gaming machine characterized in that an image showing a movable part of the operating means is superimposed and a time until the operating means becomes operable is displayed.
[Aspect B5-3]
It is characterized in that the time until the operation means becomes operable is displayed, and the operation of the operation means is displayed by using another part of the image of the operation means. A game machine to be.
[Aspect B5-4]
A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means cannot be operated when the time display ends in the middle.
[Aspect B5-5]
A gaming machine characterized in that an image of the operating means is displayed at a corner portion of the display means when the time until the operating means becomes operable is displayed.

The timer image movement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. This timer image movement effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer image movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect to be displayed on 7a.

[Timer image movement effect A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect A. In the timer image movement effect A, first, the button image display of FIG. 73 (A) is executed. This button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative pattern. Here, the first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a wall image HA is displayed above the first button image BI1. The wall image HA partially overlaps with the first button image BI1 and slides to the left at a predetermined timing.

Next, the first timer image display shown in FIG. 73 (B) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA slides to the left, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position (first position) on the wall image HA, and a part of the first timer image TN1 overlaps with the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method. Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 73 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the left from the first position as the wall image HA slides further to the left. Further, a light emitting effect is performed in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color, and after the start of the light emitting effect, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 73 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at the first position on the wall image HA. At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position on the wall image HA. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the current wall image HA, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and each partially overlaps with the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 73 (E) is executed. Specifically, with the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 displayed on the wall image HA, a character image (button operation) of "press!" To encourage the player to operate the effect button 63. (Promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position as shown in FIG. 73 (F). After that, the staging symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Timer image movement effect B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect B. In the timer image movement effect B, first, the button image display of FIG. 74 (A) is executed. This button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 73 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the stage image ST is displayed below the first button image BI1, and the first button image BI1 is arranged on the stage image ST. The images of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 are deformed so that the stereoscopic image of the button and the stage rotates horizontally at a predetermined timing. Hereinafter, the deformation of this image is also referred to as a horizontal rotation effect.

Next, the first timer image display shown in FIG. 74 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the stage image ST along with the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 appearing from the right side of the stage image ST is displayed on the stage image ST and is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 is temporarily stopped, and the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the first position. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

Next, the timer image movement effect shown in FIG. 74 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the left from the first position with the resumption of the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1. Along with the horizontal rotation effect, a light emission effect in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color is performed, and after the start of the light emission effect, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the stage image ST. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 74 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right side of the stage image ST is displayed as a stop at the first position after the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 is temporarily stopped. .. At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the stage image ST, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the stage image ST. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are adjacent to the first button image BI1, respectively.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 74 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the stage image ST, a character image (button) of "press !!" for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. Operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position as shown in FIG. 74 (F). After that, the staging symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Timer image movement effect C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the timer image movement effect C. In the timer image movement effect C, first, the button image display of FIG. 75 (A) is executed. This button image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 73 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, the first timer image display shown in FIG. 75 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, moves to the left, and is connected to a predetermined position (first position) on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 at the first position is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method. Next, the timer image movement effect of FIG. 75 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to a predetermined position (second position) below the first button image BI1. Further, a light emitting effect is performed in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color, and after the start of the light emitting effect, the second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 75 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right side of the display screen 7a moves to the left and is connected to the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The position where the second timer image TN2 is connected is the same as the position where the first timer image TN1 is initially connected. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at the second position below the first button image BI1, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are adjacent to the first button image BI1, respectively.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 75 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are connected (adjacent) to the first button image BI1, a character image of "press!" For prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation promotion image) The OPI and the timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position as shown in FIG. 75 (F). After that, the staging symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer image movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first effect of displaying the first timer image TN1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the first effect. After the first effect, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at another position on the display screen 7a, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the position where the first timer image TN1 is displayed. And are configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (B), 74 (B), and 75 (B), the first timer image TN1 at the time of displaying the first timer image is the first button image BI1. Adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (D), 74 (D), and 75 (D), the first timer image TN1 at the time of displaying the second timer image is the second timer image TN2. Is adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (D), 74 (D), and 75 (D), the first timer image TN1 at the time of displaying the second timer image is the first button image BI1. Adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 (C), 74 (C), and 75 (C), the first timer image TN2 is displayed before being displayed at the first position. The light emission effect of the button image BI1 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first button image BI1 has a shape showing the appearance of the operation unit (here, the effect button 63) of the gaming machine 1. There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer image movement effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the effect by the two timer images TN1 and TN2 can be executed. However, instead of the first button image BI1, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using an image having an appearance shape of the operation unit different from that of the effect button 63. Further, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit instead of the first button image BI1. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc. such as a character image. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
The timers of the timer images TN in FIGS. 73 to 75 are of the countdown method, but may be of the countup method. Further, the timer image TN does not have to be adjacent to the button image BB.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image movement effects A to C shown in FIGS. 73 to 75 may be displayed in combination as appropriate. Further, the timer image movement effects A to C may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, or may be added with other effect contents. Further, the timer image movement effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 73 to 75 with respect to the positions and movement directions of the operation unit image, the decorative symbol, and the hold icon, and may be any position or movement direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer image.
A first effect in which the first timer image is displayed at a first position while the first image is displayed on the display means, and after the first effect, the first timer A gaming machine characterized in that an image is displayed at a second position and a second effect in which the second timer image is displayed at the first position can be executed.
◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the first timer image at the first position is adjacent to the first image.
◇ [Aspect C1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the first image.
◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3.
In the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the second timer image at the first position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second effect, a predetermined effect using the first image is performed before the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
◇ [Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5 is further described.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the operator
The first image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an image showing the appearance of the operating means.

The timer image tilt display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. This timer image tilt display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer image tilt display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect to be displayed on the screen 7a.

[Timer image tilt display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect A. In the timer image tilt display effect A, first, the first timer image display shown in FIG. 76 (A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Further, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and the fan-shaped area image SC is displayed over the entire display screen 7a. The color of the area image SC is different from that of other parts of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower right on the area image SC. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 76 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the fan-shaped region image SC, and is displayed diagonally as compared with the case where it is displayed at the first position. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 76 (C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves from the first position on the area image SC to the upper left, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the area image SC at a predetermined timing. Will be done. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the region image SC and is displayed at an inclination of about 90 degrees as compared with the time when it is displayed at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 76 (D) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the area image SC and is displayed diagonally as compared with the case where it is displayed at the first position. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves to the lower left along the area image SC and is displayed at an inclination of about 90 degrees or more as compared with the time when it is displayed at the first position. Further, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an enlargement effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 76 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of "press!" (Button operation) for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. (Promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position as shown in FIG. 76 (F). After that, the staging symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Timer image tilt display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect B. In the timer image tilt display effect B, first, the first timer image display shown in FIG. 77 (A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 76 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Further, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined position (first position) near the center of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is located above the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 77 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) at the first position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at an angle as compared with the state at the time when it appears on the display screen 7a. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 77 (C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 is displayed, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at a second position near the center on the right side of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed tilted by about 90 degrees at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 77 (D) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) at the second position and is displayed diagonally compared to the state at the time when it appears on the display screen 7a. Will be done. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees or more with respect to the state at the time when it appears on the display screen 7a. Further, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an enlargement effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 77 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of "press!" (Button operation) for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. (Promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position as shown in FIG. 77 (F). After that, the staging symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Timer image tilt display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect C. In the timer image tilt display effect C, first, the first timer image display shown in FIG. 78 (A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the reach effect of the decorative symbol, as in FIG. 76 (A). Here, the first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Further, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at a position (first position) adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is a countdown method.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 78 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed diagonally as compared with the case where it is displayed at the first position. The first timer image TN1 is in contact with the first button image BI1 even during movement. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 78 (C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves from the first position to the upper left along the first button image BI1, the first position adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1 at a predetermined timing. The second timer image TN2 is displayed in. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is a countdown method. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the first button image BI1 and is displayed at an angle of about 90 degrees as compared with when it was displayed at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display of FIG. 78 (D) is executed. Specifically, similarly to the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed diagonally as compared with the case where it is displayed at the first position. To. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves downward to the left along the first button image BI1 and is displayed at an inclination of about 90 degrees or more as compared with the time when it is displayed at the first position. Further, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an enlargement effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, “0:00”), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 78 (E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in contact with the first button image BI1 are displayed, a character image of "press!" For prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. (Button operation promotion image) The OPI and the timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position as shown in FIG. 78 (F). After that, the staging symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer image tilt display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 (B), 77 (B), and 78 (B), the first timer is displayed in a state where the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The image TN1 is configured to be able to execute the first effect in which the image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined angle with respect to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, in the first effect, the first timer image TN1 is adjacent to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first effect shown in FIGS. 76 (B), 77 (B), and 78 (B), FIGS. 76 (C), 77 (C), and 78 (B) As shown in C), the second effect in which the first timer image TN1 tilted at an angle different from that in the first effect is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the first button image BI1 has a shape showing the appearance of the operation unit (here, the effect button 63) of the gaming machine 1. There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 (D) (E) and 78 (D) (E), when the countdown value displayed on the first timer image TN1 reaches a predetermined value. In addition, a third effect in which the size of the first timer image TN1 changes can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer image tilt display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the effect by the two timer images TN1 and TN2 can be executed. However, instead of the first button image BI1, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using an image having an appearance shape of the operation unit different from that of the effect button 63. Further, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation unit instead of the first button image BI1. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc. such as a character image. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. Even with this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with a novel production, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 2]
The timers of the timer images TN in FIGS. 76 to 78 are of the countdown method, but may be of the countup method. Further, the timer image TN of FIGS. 76 to 78 may or may not be adjacent to the button image BI1. Further, the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in FIGS. 76 to 78 may or may not be adjacent to each other.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image tilt display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the timer image tilt display effects A to C may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, or may be added with other effect contents. Further, the timer image tilt display effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 76 to 78 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the operation unit image, the decorative symbol, and the hold icon, and may be any position or moving direction.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image.
A game characterized in that it is possible to execute a first effect in which the timer image is displayed at a predetermined angle with respect to the first image while the first image is displayed on the display means. Machine.
◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the timer image is adjacent to the first image.
◇ [Aspect C2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that after the first effect, a second effect in which the timer image tilted at an angle different from that at the time of the first effect can be displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3 is further described.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the operator
The first image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an image showing the appearance of the operating means.
◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a third effect in which the size of the timer image changes when the countdown value displayed on the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

The timer button effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80. This timer button effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (during one variation effect) (for example, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game.

[Timer button effect A]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the timer button effect A.
In the timer button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the first button display effect is executed. In this first button display effect, the button image C3A is displayed. The button image C3A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the timer image C3B and the button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3B is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image C3B shown in FIG. 79 (B), "50 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the second button display effect is executed. In this second button display effect, the button image C3C and the timer image C3B are displayed. The button image C3C is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image C3C is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image showing a state in which the color of the button image C3A is darkened and / or a state in which the button image C3A is lit. Is. Further, adjacent to the button image C3C, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The timer image C3B shows a timer value of "0 seconds". The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3B becomes "0 seconds". Not limited to this, it may be displayed after the timer value becomes a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before becoming “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the character movable effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. This accessory movable effect is an effect in which the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the deployment position and is arranged on the display screen 7a (the position where the display screen 7a is hidden). This character movable production functions as a chance up.

[Timer button effect B]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the timer button effect B.
In the timer button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), the first button display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 79 (A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3D is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, and is arranged in the button image C3A. In the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80 (B), "30 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), the second button display effect is executed. In this second button display effect, the button image C3C and the timer image C3D are displayed. In the timer image C3D, the timer value "0 seconds" is shown in the button image C3C. The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3D becomes "0 seconds". Not limited to this, it may be displayed after the timer value becomes a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before becoming “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (D), the retimer display effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. In this re-timer display effect, the timer display is executed again, that is, the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed. In this case, the timer image C3D is arranged in the button image C3A as in FIG. 80 (B). In the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80 (D), "50 seconds", which is longer than that in the case of FIG. 80 (B), is shown as the initial timer value. This makes it possible to suggest that the re-timer display effect has a high degree of expectation for a big hit.

In the timer display effect in the timer button effects A and B, a plurality of patterns of timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D are prepared. For example, as the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D, the first pattern is set to 50 seconds and 30 seconds, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, and the second pattern is from the first pattern. It is set to 70 seconds and 50 seconds, respectively, which are long. In this case, as the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D, the jackpot expectation is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. When the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed in the first pattern and when they are displayed in the second pattern as the initial timer values, they function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer button effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the timer image is displayed when the button image C3A is displayed in the timer button effects A and B, and after the timer image is displayed. , The button image C3C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed according to the timer value of the timer image reaching a predetermined value (0 seconds). According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change in the button image from the timer display, and can prevent the player from missing the pressing timing of the effect button 63. Therefore, the participation rate of the player in the game production can be improved, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one fluctuation effect. According to this configuration, the timer value shifts from the initial value (50 seconds or 30 seconds) to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one fluctuation effect, so that the player can change the button image from the timer display without error. It can be recognized, and it is possible to suppress the missed pressing timing of the effect button 63. Therefore, the participation rate of the player in the game production can be improved, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the timer image C3D is displayed when the button image C3A is displayed in the timer button effect B, and after the timer image C3D is displayed, the timer image is displayed. A button image C3C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed in response to the C3D timer value reaching a predetermined value (0 seconds), and the player presses the effect button 63. A retimer display effect is executed in which the timer image C3D and the button image C3A are displayed again. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change in the button image from the timer display, can prevent the effect button 63 from being missed, and the timer display is displayed again after the effect button 63 is pressed. Since it is executed, it is possible to give a surprise to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to play while improving the participation rate of the player in the game production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, in the timer button effect B, the timer image C3D is displayed in the button image C3A. According to this configuration, the timer display can strongly presage the player an effect (button pressing effect, etc.) related to the effect button 63, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display). According to this configuration, it is possible to create a chance-up effect with the initial value of the timer, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the jackpot expectation is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. .. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect can be created by the initial value of the timer, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the initial value of the timer. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer button effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. And, in response to the pressing, the accessory movable effect and the retimer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the effect button 63 is not pressed by the player even though the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, the character movable effect and the retimer display effect are executed. May be good.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one fluctuation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the timer button effects A and B are not limited to this. May be executed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer button effect shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed. May be displayed at the same time.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the value reaches a predetermined value, the above-mentioned time-out display effect can be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the jackpot expectation is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the timer button effects A and B, when the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed, the timer image is displayed in the first color (for example, blue) and the second color (for example). For example, there are cases where it is displayed in gold), and each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and when the second color is set rather than when the first color is set. However, the configuration may have a high expectation of big hits.

[Modification 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. And, in response to the pressing, the accessory movable effect and the retimer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the second button effect, the button image C3C is displayed, and when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the pseudo-continuous effect, the jackpot notice effect, the reach development destination advance notice effect, and the jackpot expectation degree An effect such as a suggestion effect, a pending change notice, or a look-ahead start notice may be executed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C3-1]
An effect display means that can execute multiple display effects,
An operation unit that can be operated by the player,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the first operation unit representing the operation unit.
The second display effect is an effect of performing the first timer display.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the operation unit representing the operation unit and displaying a second image of the operation unit that urges the player to operate the operation unit.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the timer value of the first timer display in the second display effect becomes a predetermined value. Depending on the situation, the third display effect may be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C3-2]
It is equipped with a symbol display means capable of performing a symbol variation display that starts and then stops the symbol variation display.
The combination effect may be performed during one time of displaying the symbol variation.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
[Aspect C3-3]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a second timer display.
The combination effect is an effect that may include a fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed, and when the player operates the operation unit, the fourth display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
[Aspect C3-4]
In the combination effect, the first timer display in the second display effect may be displayed in the area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3.
[Aspect C3-5]
The first timer display in the second display effect is a timer display of one of a plurality of modes including the timer display of the first aspect and the timer display of the second aspect. It was done,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first aspect, it functions as the first chance-up display.
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second aspect, it functions as a second chance-up display having a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first chance-up display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4.
[Aspect C3-6]
In the timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display, the initial value of the timer value is the first length.
The timer display of the second aspect of the first timer display has a second length in which the initial value of the timer value is longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-5.

The timer pseudo-continuous production will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 82. This timer pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (during one variation effect), for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect, and the like.

[Timer pseudo-continuous production A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo continuous effect A.
In the timer pseudo continuous effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the timer image C4A is displayed. The timer image C4A is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image C4A shown in FIG. 81 (A), "15 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the button pressing effect A is executed. In the button pressing effect A, the button image C4B and the timer image C4A are displayed. The button image C4B is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image C4B is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image showing a state in which the color of the button image C4D is darkened and / or a state in which the button image C4D is lit. Is. Further, adjacent to the button image C4B, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The timer image C4A shows a timer value of "0 seconds". The button image C4B is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes "0 seconds". Not limited to this, it may be displayed after the timer value becomes a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before becoming “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C4B disappears after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the pseudo continuous effect A is executed. In the pseudo-ream effect A, the pseudo-ream suggestion image C4C is displayed. The pseudo-ream suggestion image C4C is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-ream effect, and more specifically, “pseudo × 2” suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect is the second time is shown. Further, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are temporarily stopped at a logo symbol suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the mode of "7, logo symbol, 7".
After the pseudo continuous effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As predetermined effects, various effects such as reach effect, super reach effect, chance up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect), big hit notice effect, reach development destination notice effect, hold change notice, or look-ahead start notice are executed. obtain.
The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the fluctuation change, during the reach effect, and the like. Along with a production that repeats the production of temporarily stopping at least a part, a production that repeats the production of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of pseudo-ream such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo". Includes an effect of executing a variable effect of a decorative pattern.

[Timer pseudo-continuous production B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the timer pseudo continuous effect B.
In the timer pseudo continuous effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), the timer button display effect A is executed. In this timer button display effect A, the timer image C4A and the button image C4D are displayed. The button image C4D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on. The timer image C4A is the same as the timer image C4A of FIG. 81 (A), the timer value is displayed by a countdown method, and "15 seconds" as the initial value of the timer is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the button pressing effect A is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 81 (B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the pseudo continuous effect A is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 81 (C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), the timer button display effect B is executed. In the timer button display effect B, the timer image C4A and the button image C4D are displayed in the timer button display effect B. The button image C4D is the same as the button image C4D shown in FIG. 82 (A). The timer image C4A shows "30 seconds" as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the button pressing effect B is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 82 (B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (F), the pseudo continuous effect B is executed. In the pseudo-ream effect B, the pseudo-ream suggestion image C4E is displayed. The pseudo-ream suggestion image C4E is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-ream effect, and more specifically, “pseudo × 3” suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect is the third time is shown. Further, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are temporarily stopped at a logo symbol suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the mode of "7, logo symbol, 7".
After the pseudo continuous effect B, a predetermined effect is executed. As predetermined effects, various effects such as reach effect, super reach effect, chance up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect), big hit notice effect, reach development destination notice effect, hold change notice, or look-ahead start notice are executed. obtain.

In the timer display effect in the timer pseudo-continuous effect A and B, a plurality of patterns of timer initial values of the timer image C4A are prepared. For example, as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A, the first pattern is set to 15 seconds as shown in FIG. 82, and the second pattern is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the first pattern. In this case, in the timer display effect, the probability that the timer pseudo-continuous effect B will occur when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A. That is, after the pseudo-continuous effect, there is a high probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82 (F)) will be performed again. When the timer image C4A is displayed in the first pattern and when it is displayed in the second pattern as the initial timer value, it functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer pseudo continuous effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, the timer image C4A is displayed in the timer pseudo-continuous staging A and B, and the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In response to this, the button image C4B prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of surprise rather than simply executing the pseudo-continuous production, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, the button image C4D and the timer image C4A suggesting that the button effect using the effect button 63 is to be performed is displayed in the timer pseudo continuous effect B. When the timer value of the timer image C4A reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), the button image C4B prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed, and the player presses the effect button 63. Pseudo-continuous production is executed according to. According to this configuration, by displaying the button image C4D, it is possible to predict the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect and give a feeling of excitement to the progress of the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B are executed during one variation effect. According to this configuration, the timer value shifts from the initial value to a predetermined value (0 seconds) during one fluctuation effect, so that the player can recognize the change in the button image from the timer display without error, and the effect. It is possible to prevent the button 63 from missing the pressing timing. Therefore, the participation rate of the player in the game production can be improved, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, in the timer pseudo-ream effect B, after the pseudo-ream effect A is executed, the timer button display effect is executed again (see FIG. 82 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to give a feeling of expectation that the pseudo-continuous production will be realized again, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer pseudo-continuous staging A and B, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display). According to this configuration, it is possible to create a chance-up effect with the initial value of the timer, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer pseudo-continuous staging A and B, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the probability that the timer pseudo-continuous effect B will occur when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set, that is, After the pseudo-continuous effect, there is a high probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82 (F)) will be performed again. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect can be created by the initial value of the timer, and the player can look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the initial value of the timer. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the timer pseudo-continuous production.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, the button image C4B is displayed by the button pressing effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. The pseudo-continuous effect is executed in response to the pressing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the effect button 63 is not pressed by the player even though the button image C4B is displayed in the button press effect, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the timer pseudo-continuous effects A. , B may be executed across a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, the timer image C4A is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image C4A may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the value reaches a predetermined value, the above-mentioned time-out display effect can be executed.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer pseudo-continuous staging A and B, the timer initial value of the timer image C4A may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern. Each function as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the probability that the timer pseudo-continuous effect B will occur when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set, that is, After the pseudo-continuous effect, there is a high probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82 (F)) will be performed again, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the timer pseudo-series effects A and B, when the timer initial value of the timer image C4A is displayed, the timer image is displayed in the first color (for example, blue) and the second color (for example, blue). , Gold), each of which functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and is better when the second color is set than when the first color is set. The configuration may be such that the probability of the timer pseudo-continuous effect B, that is, the probability that the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 82 (F)) is performed again after the pseudo-continuous effect is high.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer pseudo-continuous productions A and B shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two timer images are displayed. The above timer images may be displayed at the same time.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C4-1]
An effect display means that can execute multiple types of display effects,
An operation unit that can be operated by the player,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing the first timer display.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the operation unit representing the operation unit and displaying the image of the first operation unit that urges the player to operate the operation unit.
The third display effect is a pseudo-continuous effect.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed according to the timer value of the first timer display in the first display effect becoming a predetermined value. , The third display effect may be performed in response to the player operating the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C4-2]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying an image of a second operation unit representing the operation unit.
The combination effect is an effect that may include a fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display may be performed when the first display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1.
[Aspect C4-3]
It is equipped with a symbol display means capable of performing a symbol variation display that starts and then stops the symbol variation display.
The combination effect may be performed during one time of displaying the symbol variation.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2.
[Aspect C4-4]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of performing a second timer display.
The combination effect is an effect that may include a fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect may be performed after the third display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3.
[Aspect C4-5]
The first timer display in the first display effect is a timer display of one of a plurality of modes including the timer display of the first aspect and the timer display of the second aspect. It was done,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first aspect, it functions as the first chance-up display.
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second aspect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed in the combination effect. It functions as a second chance-up display with a higher expectation than the first chance-up display.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-4.
[Aspect C4-6]
In the timer display of the first aspect of the first timer display, the initial value of the timer value is the first length.
The timer display of the second aspect of the timer display has a second length in which the initial value of the timer value is longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C4-5.

The pending change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. This hold change effect is performed in parallel with the variable effect of the decorative pattern. Of course, it includes the execution of reach production (super reach production).

[Holding change production A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the hold change effect A. The hold change effect A is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the pre-reading effect patterns A and B described above. The hold change effect A has two modes based on the look-ahead effect pattern.

First, in the hold change effect A, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. Further, a hold image 9A and a hold digestion image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the screen.

As one aspect following the variation start effect, the change display effect (1) is executed as shown in FIG. 83 (B). In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 marked with "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed such that the change image CG1 is sucked into the hold image HGW, which is one of the hold images 9A. The reserved image HGW is displayed in white. This hold image HGW corresponds to the target hold of the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the hold change effect (1) is performed. In the hold change effect (1), the white hold image HGW changes to the blue hold image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

On the other hand, as another aspect following the fluctuation start effect, the change display effect (2) is executed as shown in FIG. 83 (E). In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 marked with "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), the change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed such that the change image CG2 is sucked into the hold image HGW, which is one of the hold images 9A. The reserved image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), the hold change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the white hold image HGW changes to the red hold image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Hold change production B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the hold change effect B. The hold change effect B is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the pre-reading effect patterns A and B described above.

First, in the hold change effect B, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. Further, a hold image 9A and a hold digestion image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 marked with "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed such that the change image CG1 is sucked into the hold image HGW, which is one of the hold images 9A. The reserved image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the hold change effect (1) is performed. In the hold change effect (1), the white hold image HGW changes to the blue hold image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the change display effect (1) in which the change image CG1 is displayed is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 84 (B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the change movement effect (1) is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 84 (C), and the change image CG1 is sucked into the changed hold image HGB from the hold image HGW. Is done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the hold change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the blue hold image HGB changes to red and then to the hold image HGR.

[Hold change production C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the hold change effect C. The hold change effect C is executed as one of the look-ahead effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the pre-reading effect patterns A and B described above.

First, in the hold change effect C, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. Further, a hold image 9A and a hold digestion image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the button pressing promotion effect is executed. In the button pressing promotion effect, the button image BB indicating the effect button 63 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the text image TG "Continuous hit!" Is displayed together with the button image BB. As a result, the player is urged to repeatedly hit the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), the change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an elliptical change image CG1 marked with "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue. At this time, the button pressing promotion effect is also performed in parallel.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an elliptical change image CG2 marked with "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG2 is red. At this time, the button pressing promotion effect is also performed in parallel.

That is, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 by executing the button press promotion effect, the blue change image CG1 is displayed first, and then the red change image CG2 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed such that the change image CG2 is sucked into the hold image HGW, which is one of the hold images 9A. The reserved image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the hold change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the white hold image HGW changes to the red hold image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect in this embodiment is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an elliptical change image marked “Change” is displayed as a change display effect. The reserved image HGW is changed corresponding to this changed image. According to this configuration, the change image can be expected to change the reserved image, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the white reserved image HGW is displayed as shown in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D). Is changed to a blue reserved image HGB. Further, when the red change image CG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the white reserved image HGW becomes the red reserved image HGR as shown in FIGS. 83 (F) and 83 (G). Can be changed. According to this configuration, the displayed change images CG1 and CG2 can be expected to change to the reserved images HGB and HGR, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the white reserved image HGW is displayed as shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D). Is changed to a blue reserved image HGB. Further, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed again as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the blue reserved image HGB becomes the red reserved image HGR as shown in FIGS. 84 (F) and 84 (G). Can be changed to. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect a change to the reserved image HGR by displaying the change image CG1 again, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 (C), (F), 84 (C), (F), and 85 (E), the change movement effect is performed. In the change movement effect, the change movement effect is such that the change image is sucked into the hold image, which is one of the hold images 9A, and the hold image is changed. According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a change in the reserved image, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the button pressing promotion effect is executed, and the player is urged to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). According to this configuration, the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed by operating the effect button 63, so that the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of this embodiment is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an elliptical change image marked “Change” is displayed as a change display effect. The reserved image HGW is changed corresponding to this changed image. Here, the blue change image CG1 and the red change image CG2 are taken as examples, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, there may be three or more types of change images.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (B), it changes to the blue reserved image HGB, and the red change image as shown in FIG. 83 (E). When CG2 is displayed, it changes to a red reserved image HGR. That is, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the changed image and the reserved image after the change. On the other hand, two or more types of change images may correspond to one reserved image, or one change image may correspond to two or more types of reserved images.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the button pressing promotion effect is executed, and the player is urged to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). On the other hand, the change display effect shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D) may be performed without operating the effect button 63.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the button pressing promotion effect is executed, and the player is urged to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). On the other hand, when the effect button 63 is not operated, the change display effect shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D) is not performed, and FIG. 85 (B) is followed by FIG. 85 (F). The pending change effect as shown may be performed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the button pressing promotion effect is executed, and the player is urged to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85 (C) and 85 (D). As another aspect to this, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly hit, the effect does not shift to the change display effect (2) as shown in FIG. 85 (D). In this case, it is conceivable to execute the change movement effect (1) and the hold change effect (1) in the same manner as shown in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C5-1]
A display means that can notify the number of held images by the number of displayed images on hold,
It is a gaming machine equipped with a staging means capable of executing a plurality of staging.
The staging means can display a plurality of change notice images foretelling changes in the reserved image.
A gaming machine characterized in that the reserved image is changed in correspondence with the plurality of change notice images.

[Aspect C5-2]
When the first change notice image is displayed for one of the hold images, the hold image is changed to the first hold image, and when the second change notice image is displayed, the hold image is changed. A gaming machine characterized by changing to a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-3]
When the first change notice image is displayed for one of the hold images, the hold image is changed to the first hold image, and when the first change notice image is displayed again, the hold image is changed. A gaming machine characterized by changing an image into a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-4]
A gaming machine characterized in that the displayed change notice image acts on one of the reserved images, and then the reserved image is changed.

[Aspect C5-5]
Further equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of change notice images are displayed after the operation of the operating means.

The effect of displaying the number of acquired balls will be described with reference to FIG. 86. This acquisition ball number display effect can be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, it can be displayed as one of the round game effects in which the image control microcomputer 101 receives the round designation command from the sub control board 90 and executes it.

[Display of the number of acquired balls]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the acquisition ball number display effect. In the winning ball number display effect, first, the winning image display shown in FIG. 86 (A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that wins the first large winning opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71, which is "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)). This is executed when at least a part of the subsequent game balls has passed through the V region 39. Here, a V winning image WP suggesting that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 is displayed. Since the V winning image WP is an image that suggests that the time will be shortened with high accuracy later, it can be said that it is an image that suggests that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later. In FIG. 86 (A), the character image CRA1 is displayed while the V winning image WP is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the number of balls that can be acquired this time display CGN is displayed. The number of balls that can be acquired this time is a measure of the number of balls that can be acquired in one round game. Here, at the start of the next round of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71, the number of balls that can be acquired this time is displayed as a guideline for the number of balls that can be acquired in the round game. In FIG. 86B, a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed in a state where the number of balls that can be acquired this time is displayed CGN. The right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are images suggesting that the game ball is launched to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the currently acquired ball number display AAN is displayed. The currently acquired number of balls is the number of balls already acquired in the winning game. Here, at the start of the round, the number of balls acquired from the first round of the jackpot game to before the start of the round game is displayed as the currently acquired number of balls display AAN. In FIG. 86 (C), a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 and character images CRA1 are displayed in a state where the currently acquired number of balls display AAN is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the currently acquired ball number display AAN and the planned cumulative acquired ball number display TPN are displayed. The planned cumulative number of balls to be acquired is the number of balls to be acquired at the end of this round. Here, during the round game from the start of the round, the planned cumulative number of acquired balls display TPN is displayed adjacent to the currently acquired number of balls display AAN. In FIG. 86 (D), the planned cumulative acquired ball number display TPN and the currently acquired ball number display AAN are displayed adjacent to each other in the vertical direction, and a plurality of character images CRA1 and CRA2 are displayed in total.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the acquired ball number display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the currently acquired number of balls AAN is displayed in a state where a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of exhilaration by knowing the number of balls already acquired in the jackpot game and a feeling of expectation that can be further acquired by the right-handed display, which improves the interest. Can be planned.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the planned cumulative number of acquired balls display TPN is displayed adjacent to the currently acquired number of balls AAN during the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling that the number of currently acquired balls approaches the planned cumulative number of acquired balls, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the number of balls that can be acquired this time is displayed as the CGN at the start of the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of exhilaration by knowing the number of balls that can be acquired in this round, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the V winning image WP shown in FIG. 86 (A) is displayed before the display CGN showing the number of balls that can be acquired this time shown in FIG. 86 (B) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player by suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are displayed together with the CGN for displaying the number of balls that can be acquired this time. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of exhilaration by knowing the number of balls that can be acquired in this round and a feeling of expectation that it will be realized by right-handed display by right-handed display, aiming to improve the interest. be able to.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the acquired ball number display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), an effect exemplifying the V winning image is shown as an image suggesting that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect by using an image other than the V winning image, which suggests that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later, instead of the V winning image. The image other than the V winning image suggesting that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later is, for example, an image suggesting that the big hit game is started or an image suggesting that the small hit game is started. Is.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 (B) and 86 (C), two right-handed images are displayed. However, the gaming machine 1 may display three or more right-handed images. Further, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed images having different sizes from each other. Further, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed images RD1 and RD2 in FIG. 86 (D).

[Modification 3]
The acquired ball number display effect may be executed in a special game other than the jackpot game. For example, it may be executed during a small hit game.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image suggesting that the game ball is launched in a predetermined direction.
It is characterized in that, in a state where a plurality of the first images are displayed during the winning game, the first effect of displaying the currently acquired number of balls representing the number of balls already acquired in the winning game can be executed. A game machine to be.
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1.
It is characterized by being able to execute a second effect of displaying the planned cumulative number of balls to be acquired at the end of this round, adjacent to the display of the number of currently acquired balls during the round game. A game machine to play.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2.
A gaming machine characterized in that at the start of a round game, a third effect in which the number of balls that can be acquired this time is displayed, which represents the number of balls that can be acquired in this round, can be executed.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image suggesting that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later.
A gaming machine characterized in that a fourth effect in which the second image is displayed on the display means can be executed before the third effect is executed.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the third effect, the first image is displayed together with the display of the number of balls that can be acquired this time.

The payout display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 88. This payout display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol in the probability change state or the time saving state (for example, the final stage of the reach effect (before the start of the jackpot game)), or during the jackpot game.

[Payout display production A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the payout display effect A.
In the payout display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the payout schedule display effect is executed. This payout schedule display effect is executed after the jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as the jackpot) is notified, before the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as the jackpot game), or during the jackpot game, and is paid out. The image D2A suggesting the expected number of balls to be played is displayed. The image D2A suggesting the number of balls to be paid out is an image suggesting the number of balls to be paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of balls to be paid out). In the image D2A suggesting the number of balls to be paid out in FIG. 87 (A), it is shown that 800 balls are to be paid out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule number suggestion image D2B is displayed. Cumulative payout number suggestion image D2B is a jackpot that was won before the jackpot among consecutive jackpots (hereinafter, also referred to as continuous-chan middle jackpot) during the time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as continuous-chan middle jackpot). It is an image suggesting the number of balls (hereinafter, also referred to as the cumulative number of balls to be paid out) obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out to the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on. In other words, the cumulative payout number of balls suggestion image D2B suggests the number of balls to be paid out in the jackpot game based on the consecutive Chan middle jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. In this cumulative payout additional display effect, the cumulative payout number suggestion image D2B and the cumulative payout number suggestion image D2C are displayed. Cumulative payout number suggestion image D2C is a ball obtained by adding the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the past jackpot in the consecutive Chan to the number of balls already paid out during the jackpot game. It is an image suggesting a number (hereinafter, also referred to as a cumulative payout number). In other words, the cumulative payout number suggestion image D2C suggests the number of balls already paid out in the jackpot game based on the consecutive Chan medium jackpot. In FIG. 87 (C), the cumulative payout number suggestion image D2B is arranged below the cumulative payout number suggestion image D2C, and is located between the cumulative payout number suggestion image D2B and the cumulative payout number suggestion image D2C. Is indicated by a slash (line). That is, the cumulative payout number suggestion image D2B is placed at the position of the denominator, and the cumulative payout number suggestion image D2C is placed at the numerator position, and is represented in the form of "cumulative payout number / cumulative payout number of balls". ..

This payout display effect A is executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the probability-changing state with a time reduction, and is not executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the non-probability-changing state with a time reduction. Not limited to this, the payout display effect A may be executed even at the time of a big hit that does not shift to the non-probability change state with a time reduction.

[Payout display production B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the payout display effect B.
In the payout display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the payout schedule display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 87.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout number of balls suggestion image D2B, the jackpot payout number related image D2E, and the number of consecutive chans are suggested. Image D2D is displayed. The image D2E related to the number of payout balls suggests the number of balls already paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of payout balls) and the number of balls to be paid out. In FIG. 88 (B), the display of the number of balls to be paid out is arranged on the right side of the display of the number of balls to be paid out, and a slash ( Line) is shown. That is, the display of the number of balls to be paid out is arranged at the position of the denominator, and the display of the number of balls to be paid out is arranged at the position of the denominator, and is expressed in the form of "the number of balls to be paid out / the number of balls to be paid out". The consecutive chan number suggestion image D2D is an image suggesting the number of consecutive chan medium jackpots, that is, the number of consecutive chan jackpots.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88C, the cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. This cumulative payout additional display effect is executed during the jackpot game, and the payout number-related image D2E, the consecutive chan number suggestion image D2D, and the cumulative payout number-related image D2F are displayed. The cumulative payout number-related image D2F suggests the cumulative payout number and the cumulative payout number. In FIG. 88 (C), the display of the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is arranged on the right side of the display of the cumulative number of balls to be paid out, and a slash ( Line) is shown. That is, the display of the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is arranged at the position of the denominator, and the display of the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is arranged at the position of the denominator, and is expressed in the form of "cumulative number of balls to be paid out / cumulative number of balls to be paid out".

In the payout display effects A and B, as described above, the payout schedule display effect is executed at the end of the variable effect (reach effect) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. Is executed at the end of the variable effect (reach effect) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout additional display effect can be executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, for example, in the payout display effects A and B, the payout schedule display effect is executed before the start of the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect and the cumulative payout additional display effect are executed during the jackpot game.

This payout display effect B is executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the probability-changing state with a time reduction, and is not executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the non-probability-changing state with a time reduction. Not limited to this, the payout display effect B may be executed even at the time of a big hit that does not shift to the non-probability change state with a time reduction.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the payout display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the payout schedule display effect indicates the expected payout number number suggestion image D2A, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect. Then, the image D2B suggesting the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can grasp the cumulative number of balls to be paid out during the consecutive chan in addition to the number of balls to be paid out in the jackpot game, so that the player's motivation to play can be improved. .. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, when the cumulative payout number of balls is displayed in the cumulative payout additional display effect in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative number of balls is cumulative. The number of balls to be paid out is displayed. According to this configuration, the player's willingness to play can be improved until the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is reached. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, when the cumulative payout schedule display effect or the cumulative payout additional display effect is displayed in the payout display effect B, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is displayed. The number of balls to be paid out is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the number of balls to be paid out, and can improve the player's willingness to play until the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is reached. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, when the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is displayed in the payout display effect C, the number of consecutive chans is suggested. According to this configuration, the average number of balls to be paid out (average number of balls to be paid out) in one big hit game can be associated from the relationship between the cumulative number of balls to be paid out and the number of consecutive chans. , The player can feel happiness, and when the average number of balls to be paid out is small, the player's motivation to play can be improved in order to extend the number of consecutive chans. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the payout display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, the cumulative payout additional display effect is executed in the payout display effects A and B, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cumulative payout additional display effect may not be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, a display indicating the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, if the gaming state after the jackpot is not the probabilistic gaming state, the display indicating the cumulative number of balls to be paid out may not be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, the payout display effects A and B are executed in the order of the payout schedule display effect, the cumulative payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout additional display effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the order thereof may be changed. For example, the order may be the payout schedule display effect, the cumulative payout additional display effect, the cumulative payout schedule display effect, or the cumulative payout schedule display effect, the payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout additional display effect.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is determined based on the jackpot during the consecutive chans. Is not limited to this. For example, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is the number of balls (cumulative number of balls to be paid out on the day) that are paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpot that was won before the jackpot among the consecutive jackpots from the morning of the day. The number of balls to be paid out may be added to the number of balls to be paid out (cumulative number of balls to be paid out on the day). In this case, the cumulative number of balls paid out on the day may also be displayed.
In addition, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is set to the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpot won before the jackpot (the cumulative number of balls to be paid out at a predetermined timing) among the consecutive jackpots from a certain timing. The number of balls to be paid out may be added to the number of balls to be paid out (cumulative number of balls to be paid out at a predetermined timing). In this case, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out at a predetermined timing may also be displayed. The gaming machine 1 may have a function that allows the player to determine "a certain timing". This allows the player to arbitrarily set a "certain timing".

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
An effect display means that can execute multiple display effects,
Judgment means to judge whether it is a big hit by lottery,
In the case of a jackpot, a jackpot game execution means capable of executing a jackpot game in which a game medium is paid out to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the payout schedule indicating the number of payout schedules, which is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out in the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot.
The first jackpot is a jackpot in a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The second display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot is added to the number of game media paid out during the first jackpot game. It is a production that displays the cumulative payout schedule, which represents the cumulative payout schedule including the planned payout number.
The second jackpot is a jackpot that is won before the first jackpot among consecutive jackpots including the first jackpot in the second gaming state.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect D2-2]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is performed during the first jackpot game, and the game already paid out during the first jackpot game to the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game. It is a production that displays the cumulative payout number, which shows the cumulative payout number including the number of media.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed when the second display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1.
[Aspect D2-3]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing the jackpot payout display indicating the number of game media already paid out during the first jackpot game, which is performed during the first jackpot game.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed when the second display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2.
[Aspect D2-4]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect that is performed during the first jackpot game and displays the number of consecutive jackpots indicating the number of consecutive jackpots.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, the fifth display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3.
[Aspect D2-5]
If the first jackpot is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the first jackpot game is a third gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state, the combination effect is not executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4.

The winning image / character image superimposition effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. This winning image / character image superimposition effect can be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, it can be displayed as one of the round game effects in which the image control microcomputer 101 receives the round designation command from the sub control board 90 and executes it.

[Winning image / character image superimposition effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning image / character image superimposition effect A. In the winning image / character image superimposing effect A, first, the winning image display of FIG. 89 (A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that wins the first large winning opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71, which is "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)). This is executed when at least a part of the subsequent game balls has passed through the V region 39. Here, a V winning image WP suggesting that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 is displayed. Since the V winning image WP is an image that suggests that the time will be shortened with high accuracy later, it can be said that it is an image that suggests that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later. In FIG. 89A, the character image AN1 and the right-handed image RD1 are displayed in a state where the V winning image WP is displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the V winning image WP. As described above, in the present specification, "overlapping images" means that they appear to overlap from the viewpoint of the player, and it does not matter whether or not they actually overlap. For example, when at least a part of the V winning image WP displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing due to the first character image AN1, it can be said that the images overlap.

The first character image AN1 moves to the position of the V winning image WP, and the winning image / character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89 (B) is executed. Specifically, an image in which the first character image AN1 is superimposed on a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. In other words, an image showing a state in which the first character image AN1 is located is displayed in front of a part of the V winning image WP. Even when the first character image AN1 is overlapped, a part of the V winning image WP is displayed without being hidden. In FIG. 89B, the second character image AN2 and the right-handed image RD1 are further displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left following the first character image AN1.

By moving both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 to the left, the winning image / character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89C is executed. Specifically, an image in which both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 are overlapped is displayed on a part of the V winning image WP. In FIG. 89C, a right-handed image RD1 is further displayed.

By further moving the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 to the left, the winning image / character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89 (D) is executed. Specifically, an image in which only the second character image AN2 overlaps is displayed on a part of the V winning image WP. In other words, the V winning image WP in a state where the first character image AN1 does not overlap is displayed. The first character image AN1 is framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a.

After that, as the second character image AN2 moves further to the left, the winning image and the character image are in a non-superimposed state as shown in FIG. 89 (E). Specifically, the V winning image WP in a state where the character images (first character image AN1 and second character image AN2) do not overlap is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the second character image AN2 is framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a.

[Winning image / character image superimposition B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning image / character image superimposition effect B.
The winning image / character image superimposing effect B is different from the superimposing effect A in FIG. 89 in that the shape of the V winning image WP changes. The shape of the V winning image WP of the superimposition effect B changes so as to represent a state in which the figure representing the three-dimensional shape of the Roman character "V" is horizontally rotated. First, in FIG. 90A, the character image AN1 and the right-handed image RD1 are displayed in a state where the V winning image WP is displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), the shape of the V winning image WP changes as compared with FIG. 90 (A), and the first character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP. Image is displayed. The V winning image WP has a shape showing a state in which the figure representing the three-dimensional shape is oriented in the lateral direction as compared with FIG. 90 (A). Even when the first character image AN1 is overlapped, a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. In FIG. 90B, the second character image AN2 and the right-handed image RD1 are further displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left following the first character image AN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), while the shape of the V winning image WP changes as compared with FIG. 90 (B), the first character image AN1 and the second character are part of the V winning image WP. An image in which both of the images AN2 are overlapped is displayed. In FIG. 90C, a right-handed image RD1 is further displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), while the shape of the V winning image WP changed as compared with FIG. 90 (C), only the second character image AN2 overlapped a part of the V winning image WP. An image of the state is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the V winning image WP in a state in which the character images do not overlap is displayed while the shape of the V winning image WP changes as compared with FIG. 90 (D). After that, in FIG. 90 (F), the V winning image WP in a state where the character images do not overlap is displayed while the shape of the V winning image WP changes as compared with FIG. 90 (E).

[Winning image / character image superimposition C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning image / character image superimposition effect C.
The winning image / character image superimposition effect C is different from the superimposition effect B of FIG. 90 in the display method of the character image AN1. The character image AN1 of the superimposition effect C does not move the display screen 7a left and right to intersect the V winning image WP, but changes its shape according to the change in the shape of the V winning image WP. Specifically, the character image AN1 of the superimposition effect C is arranged on one surface of the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP, and when the three-dimensional shape of the V winning image WP is rotated horizontally, both are rotated horizontally. The shape changes to represent such a state. First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), an image in which the character image AN1 is superimposed on the V winning image WP is displayed. Specifically, an image showing a state in which the character image AN1 is located is displayed on a part of the front surface of the V winning image WP. Even when the first character image AN1 is overlapped, a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the shapes of the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 change as compared with FIG. 91 (A). Specifically, an image showing a state in which the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented in the lateral direction as compared with FIG. 91 (A) is displayed. Even in this state, the character image AN1 is superimposed on a part of the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), an image showing a state in which the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further oriented in the lateral direction than in FIG. 91 (B) is displayed. Here, the three-dimensional shape in which the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 are combined faces directly to the side, and the V winning image WP in a state where the character image AN1 does not overlap is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further rotated laterally as compared with FIG. 91 (C), and among the three-dimensional shapes of the V winning image WP. An image in which the other surface side on which the character image AN1 is not arranged can be seen is displayed. The character image AN1 is invisible due to the V winning image WP, and the V winning image WP in a state where the character image AN1 does not overlap is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further rotated laterally as compared with FIG. 91 (D), and among the three-dimensional shapes of the V winning image WP. An image in which the other side on which the character image AN1 is not arranged is the front is displayed. A part of the character image AN1 can be seen from between the V winning images WP, but the V winning image WP in a state where the character images AN1 do not overlap is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further laterally rotated as compared with FIG. 91 (E), and the character image AN1 is again subjected to the V winning image WP. The V winning image WP is displayed in a state where it cannot be seen and the character images AN1 do not overlap.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning image / character image superimposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) to (D), 90 (B) to (D), and 91 (A) and (B), at least a part of the V winning image WP. The image in which the character image is overlapped is displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 89 (A) (E) (F), 90 (A) (E) (F), and 91 (C) to (F), the V prize is obtained in a state where the character images do not overlap. The image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, the player's attention can be directed to the display of the V winning image WP, so that the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) to (D), 90 (B) to (D), and 91 (A) and (B), the V winning image WP is partially displayed. Even when the images in which the character images are overlapped are displayed, the other part of the V winning image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, even if the character image overlaps a part of the V winning image WP, the player can be shown a part of the V winning image WP. You can be convinced and you can improve your interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89, 90 (A) (B) (D) to (F), and 91 (A) (B) (D) to (F), a V prize is awarded. An image in which a right-handed image is superimposed on a part of the image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, since the V winning image WP appears to be located behind the right-handed image, it is possible to produce a sense of depth in the display, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the shape of the V winning image WP changes so as to represent a state in which the three-dimensional figure of the Roman character “V” is rotating. According to this configuration, since the V winning image WP appears to be located behind the right-handed image, it is possible to produce a sense of depth in the display, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 91, the effect of overlapping the character images and not overlapping the character images is executed with respect to the V winning image WP. According to this configuration, the player's attention can be directed to the display of the V winning image WP, so that the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning image / character image superimposition effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, a part of the V winning image WP is visible even when the V winning image WP is covered with the character image. However, the entire V winning image WP may be covered with the character image, and the V winning image WP may be invisible.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the winning image / character image superimposition effects A to C shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the winning image / character image superimposition effects A to C may not include a part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, or may be added with other effect contents. Further, the winning image / character image superimposition effects A to C are not limited to FIGS. 89 to 91 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the operation unit image, the decorative symbol, and the hold icon, and may be any position or moving direction. ..

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image that suggests that the gaming state will be advantageous to the player later.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image.
The first display in which the image in which the second image is overlapped is displayed on at least a part of the first image, and the first image in which the second image is not overlapped are displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute a second display.
◇ [Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first display, a part of the first image is displayed without overlapping the second image.
◇ [Aspect D3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image suggesting right-handed striking.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first display, an image in a state in which the third image is superimposed on a part of the first image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-3.
The first image is a gaming machine characterized in that its shape changes so as to represent a state in which a three-dimensional figure is rotating.
◇ [Aspect D3-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-3 or aspect D3-4.
The first image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a V winning image.

The meter effect in the button image will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 93. This meter effect in the button image is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during one variation effect) (for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. Can be done.

[Meter effect A in button image]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect A in the button image.
In the button meter display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, the button image E1A and the meter image E1B are displayed. The button image E1A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on. The meter image E1B is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E1B is arranged sideways in the button image E1A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92B, the point awarding effect is executed. In this point-giving effect, the button image E1A, the meter image E1B, and the point acquisition image E1C are displayed. This point-giving effect can be executed multiple times. The point acquisition image E1C is an image suggesting that a predetermined point has been given, in other words, that the player has acquired a predetermined point. In the point acquisition image E1C of FIG. 92 (B), it is shown that 3 points (3P) have been given to the player (the player has acquired 3 points). Further, in the meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A, it is shown that the meter area corresponding to the points is expanded and the meter value is increased by giving the points. The meter value of the meter image E1B increases each time the point-giving effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E1B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This point-giving effect is a reach effect, a super reach effect, a chance-up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect), a big hit notice effect, a reach development destination advance notice effect, a hold change notice, a look-ahead effect, a hold expectation degree suggestion effect, or a pseudo. It can be started according to the execution of various effects such as continuous effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button image E1A, the meter image E1B, and the chance-up image E1D are displayed. In the meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A, the meter area is enlarged and the meter value is maximized (indicated to be MAX. The chance-up image E1D is an image suggesting a chance-up. Yes, the chance-up image E1D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). The chance-up image E1D in FIG. 92 (C) suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high. The characters "!" And the characters "expectation 50%" suggesting that the jackpot expectation is about 50% are represented. The chance-up image E1D is the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Displayed adjacent to each other.

[Meter effect B in button image]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect B in the button image.
In the button meter display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the button meter display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 92 (A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the point awarding effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 92 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the button image E1A, the meter image E1B, and the timer image E1E are displayed. In the meter image E1B arranged in the button image E1A, it is shown that the meter area is expanded and the meter value is maximized (MAX). The timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the timer image E1E, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and 50 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, the button image E1F and the timer image E1E are displayed. The button image E1F is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image E1F is displayed in the same size at the position where the button image E1A was, is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and the button image E1A is darkened and / or. It is an image showing a state as if the button image E1A is lit. Further, adjacent to the button image E1F, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The timer image E1E shows that the timer value is "0 seconds". The button image E1F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes "0 seconds". Not limited to this, it may be displayed after the timer value becomes a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before becoming “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E1F disappears after the valid operation period has passed. The meter image E1B may be displayed in the button image E1F. In this case, the meter value of the meter image E1B may show the maximum (MAX) or may return to the initial value (no meter area).

After the button pressing effect, if the effect button 63 is pressed by the player within the effective operation period by the button pressing effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As predetermined effects, various effects such as reach effect, super reach effect, chance up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect), big hit notice effect, reach development destination notice effect, hold change notice, or look-ahead start notice are executed. obtain.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the meter effect in the button image is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter image E1B is displayed when the button image E1A is displayed. This meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A. Then, after the meter image E1B is displayed, when the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum (MAX), a predetermined effect (chance-up effect, etc.) is executed. According to this configuration, since the meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A, the player can associate a button effect using the effect button 63 in connection with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great expectation regarding the button effect, and other effects other than the button effect are provided in relation to the meter display. If done, it can give the player a sense of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the point giving effect is executed when the meter image E1B is arranged in the button image E1A. In the point-giving effect, the point-acquired image E1C is displayed, and when a predetermined point is given, the meter area given by the point given in the meter image E1B is expanded, and the display in which the meter value is increased is executed. To. According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image is increased by giving points, it is possible to emphasize the increase of the meter value due to the point acquisition. In addition, when the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image rises due to the point addition and reaches a predetermined value (maximum value) and develops into a button effect using the effect button 63, the player is hit by a big hit. Can give great expectations to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E is the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Displayed adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the development of the button effect using the effect button 63, and further, a sense of expectation for the jackpot when the effect button 63 is developed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, the timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX) in the timer display effect. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer image E1E reaches a predetermined value, the player has a feeling of expectation for the development of the button effect using the effect button 63, and further, a big hit in the case of the development of the button effect. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, when the timer value of the timer image E1E becomes "0 seconds" in the button pressing effect in the button image meter effect B, the player is directed. The button image E1F prompting the button 63 to be pressed is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation for the development of the button effect using the effect button 63, and further, a stronger expectation for the jackpot when the effect button 63 is developed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect have the maximum meter value (MAX) of the meter image E1B. Sometimes executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are compared with the case where the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed when the meter value of the meter image E1B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). It is possible to increase the expectation for a big hit when it develops into. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the meter effect in the button image.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E is the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Although displayed adjacent to each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E may be arranged in the button image E1A or a predetermined distance from the meter image E1B. It may be displayed at a distant position.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E1B is a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area is reduced and the meter value is lowered by the point addition by the point assignment effect. good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92 (C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 93 (C) may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the meter effects A and B in the button image, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points by the point awarding effect, the meter area may be expanded and the meter value may be increased by executing a predetermined operation. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92 (C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 93 (C) are executed. In addition, "the predetermined operation has been executed" means, for example, that the pseudo-continuous execution has been executed, the hold icon has changed (the hold change display has been performed), and the predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. It includes things that have been done, successes in certain challenges (games), and so on.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum value (MAX) for the chance-up effect and the timer display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum value (MAX) but when the predetermined value is smaller than the maximum value. As the predetermined value, for example, it may be a value of half of the meter value or a value of 1/4. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, in the meter effect A in the button image, after the chance-up image E1D is displayed in the chance-up effect, the meter value of the button image E1A is set to the initial value (0). You may try to return to. After that, the point-giving effect may be executed to increase the meter value.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, the meter image E1B is not displayed in the button pressing effect in the button image meter effect B. The meter image E1B may be displayed without limitation. In this case, the meter image E1B may be arranged in the button image E1F. After that, the point-giving effect may be executed to increase the meter value.

[Modification 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image meter effects A and B are executed during one fluctuation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the button image meter. The effects A and B may be executed over a plurality of variable effects.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, the timer image E1E is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the timer image E1E may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the value reaches a predetermined value, the button pressing effect described above can be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, one timer image is displayed in the meter effect B in the button image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more are displayed. The timer image of the above may be displayed at the same time.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit that can be operated by a player.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the first operation unit representing the operation unit.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter becomes the first aspect of the plurality of aspects.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed, and in the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed. The second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the meter is displayed in the image of the first operation unit of the first display effect, and after the second display effect, the meter is displayed. The third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-2]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a predetermined point is given.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed, and when the predetermined point is given in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. In the display effect of 2, the meter is displayed from the second aspect to the third aspect different from the first aspect.
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1.
[Aspect E1-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display that may be performed adjacent to the first operation unit image.
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-1 or the aspect E1-2.
[Aspect E1-4]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a timer display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3.
[Aspect E1-5]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
The fifth display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value, and is a second operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit. Is a production that displays
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-4.
[Aspect E1-6]
In the third display effect, when the meter becomes the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, it is when the value of the meter reaches the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5.

The display effect in the button image will be described below with reference to FIGS. 94 to 95. This button image display effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern (during one variable effect) (for example, at the start of the change of the decorative pattern, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. Can be done.

[Display effect A in button image]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the display effect A in the button image.
In the button meter display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the button meter display effect is executed. In this button meter display effect, the button image E2A and the meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2A is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on. The meter image E2B is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E2B is arranged sideways adjacent to the button image E2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the point awarding effect is executed. In this point-giving effect, the button image E2A, the meter image E2B, and the point acquisition image E2C are displayed. This point-giving effect can be executed multiple times. The point acquisition image E2C is an image suggesting that a predetermined point has been given, in other words, that the player has acquired a predetermined point. In the point acquisition image E2C of FIG. 94 (B), it is shown that 4 points (4P) have been given to the player (the player has acquired 4 points). Further, in the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, it is shown that the meter area corresponding to the point is expanded and the meter value is increased by giving the point. The meter value of the meter image E2B increases each time the point-giving effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E2B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This point-giving effect is a reach effect, a super reach effect, a chance-up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect), a big hit notice effect, a reach development destination advance notice effect, a hold change notice, a look-ahead effect, a hold expectation degree suggestion effect, or a pseudo. It can be started according to the execution of various effects such as continuous effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button image E2A, the meter image E2B, and the chance-up image E2D are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, the meter area is expanded and the meter value is maximized (indicated to be MAX. Further, the chance-up image E2D suggests a chance-up. It is an image. The chance-up image E2D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E2D of FIG. 94 (C), "GEKIATU" suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high. The characters "!" Are represented. The chance-up image E2D is displayed in the button image E2A.

[Display effect B in button image]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the display effect B in the button image.
In the button image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the button meter display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 94 (A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the point awarding effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 94 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the meter MAX notification effect is executed. In this meter MAX notification effect, the button image E2A, the meter image E2B, and the meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, it is shown that the meter area is expanded and the meter value is maximized (MAX). The meter value suggestion image E2E is an image that is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX) and suggests that the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). Further, the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the button image E2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the button pressing effect is executed. In this button pressing effect, the button image E2F, the meter value suggestion image E2E, and the meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2F is an image displayed in the same size at the position where the button image E2A was, and is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. It is an image showing that. Specifically, the button image E2F is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image showing a state in which the color of the button image E2A is darkened and / or a state in which the button image E2A is lit. Is. Further, adjacent to the button image E2F, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E2F disappears after the valid operation period has passed. The meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the button image E2F. The meter value suggestion image E2E may be displayed adjacent to the button image E2F instead of in the button image E2F, or may be displayed in the meter image E2B. Further, the meter value of the meter image E2B in FIG. 95 (D) represents the maximum (MAX). Not limited to this, the meter value of the meter image E2B may return to the initial value (without the meter area).

After the button pressing effect, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player by the button pressing effect, a predetermined effect is executed. As predetermined effects, there are various effects such as reach effect, super reach effect, chance up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect), big hit notice effect, reach development destination notice effect, hold change notice, timer display effect, or look-ahead start notice. The production can be performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the button image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the meter image E2B is displayed when the button image E2A is displayed, and the meter image E2B is displayed. When the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX) after the display of, the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed. According to this configuration, the player who sees the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can associate the execution of the button effect using the effect button 63. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed, it is possible to give the player a great expectation for the jackpot regarding the button effect. Further, since the predetermined effect is executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed, a feeling of surprise can be created in the predetermined effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the point giving effect is executed when the meter image E1B is displayed, and the point giving effect is performed. When the point acquisition image E2C is displayed and a predetermined point is given, the meter area is expanded by the point given in the meter image E2B, and the display in which the meter value is increased is executed. According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image is increased by giving points, the player can recognize the increase of the meter value by acquiring points. Therefore, since the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can be displayed by the change of the meter value, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, the meter value suggestion suggesting that the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum (MAX) in the meter MAX notification effect. The image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed. According to this configuration, when the meter value of the meter image E2B is maximized (MAX), the player is reminded that the button effect using the effect button 63 is executed before the button press effect. Can be done. Therefore, when the button effect (including the button press effect) is actually executed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for a big hit with respect to the button effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the player presses the effect button 63. The prompting button image E2F is displayed, and the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying the meter value suggestion image E2E in the area where the button image E2F is displayed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for a big hit in a predetermined effect developed by pressing the effect button 63. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the chance-up image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed by the meter value of the meter image E2B. It is executed at the maximum (MAX). According to this configuration, the chance is increased as compared with the case where the display of the chance up image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E is executed when the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). When the image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the display effect in the button image.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the meter image E2B is arranged adjacent to the bottom of the button image E2A. Is not limited to this. For example, the meter image E2B may be displayed in the button image E2A. With this configuration, the player can associate a button effect using the effect button 63 in connection with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great expectation regarding the button effect, and other effects other than the button effect are provided in relation to the meter display. If done, it can give the player a sense of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the meter image E2B may be arranged in a predetermined direction and separated by a predetermined distance from the button image E2A.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, the button image E2A is displayed when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX) in the button image display effects A and B. The chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area (inside the button image E2A), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), an image suggesting a pseudo continuous effect, an image suggesting a reach notice, and a jackpot expectation level are displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (inside the button image E2A). Various images such as images suggesting the above and timer images may be displayed, and even if various effects such as an effect of moving a predetermined character are executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (inside the button image E2A). good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, in the button pressing effect, the meter value suggestion image E2E is generated in the area where the button image E2F is displayed (inside the button image E2F). Although indicated, the invention is not limited to this. In the button pressing effect, for example, in the area where the button image E2F is displayed (inside the button image E2F), a chance-up image E2D, an image suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect, an image suggesting a reach notice, and a jackpot expectation level are displayed. Various images such as suggestive images may be displayed, and various effects such as an effect of moving a predetermined character may be executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (inside the button image E2A).

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the meter value of the meter image E2B is configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the button meter display effect, the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area is reduced and the meter value is lowered by the point addition by the point assignment effect. good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94 (C) or the meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95 (C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the meter value of the meter image E2B is configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points by the point awarding effect, the meter area may be expanded and the meter value may be increased by executing a predetermined operation. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94 (C) and the meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95 (C) are executed. In addition, "the predetermined operation has been executed" means, for example, that the pseudo-continuous execution has been executed, the hold icon has changed (the hold change display has been performed), and the predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. It includes things that have been done, successes in certain challenges (games), and so on.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX) for the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect. ), But the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect may be executed not when the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX) but when the predetermined value is smaller than the maximum value. As the predetermined value, for example, it may be a value of half of the meter value or a value of 1/4. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E2B so that the player can know the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, in the button image display effect A, after the chance-up image E2D is displayed in the chance-up effect, the meter value of the meter image E2B is set to the initial value (0). You may try to return to. After that, the point-giving effect may be executed to increase the meter value.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, after the meter image E2B is displayed by the button pressing effect, the meter value of the button image E2A is set to the initial value (0). ) May be returned. After that, the point-giving effect may be executed to increase the meter value.

[Modification 8]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image display effects A and B are executed during one variation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the button image display. The effects A and B may be executed over a plurality of variable effects.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation unit that can be operated by a player.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the first operation unit representing the operation unit.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined meter and displaying the meter in one of a plurality of modes.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the meter and performing a predetermined display when the meter becomes the first aspect of the plurality of aspects.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and the first display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed. In the third display effect, when the meter is in the first aspect, the predetermined display is performed in the area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E2-2]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a predetermined point is given.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed, and when the predetermined point is given in the fourth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. The display is performed in which the meter of the display effect of 2 is changed from the second aspect to the third aspect different from the first aspect.
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1.
[Aspect E2-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display suggesting that the meter has become the first aspect.
The gaming machine according to the aspect E2-1 or the aspect E2-2.
[Aspect E2-4]
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed, and the meter of the second display effect is the first display effect of the first display effect. Displayed in the operation unit image of 1,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3.
[Aspect E2-5]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the operation unit representing the operation unit and displaying a second image of the operation unit that urges the player to operate the operation unit.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the meter becomes the first aspect of the plurality of aspects in the third display effect, and then the second operation unit. The predetermined display is performed in the area where the image is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4.
[Aspect E2-6]
In the third display effect, when the meter becomes the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, it is when the value of the meter reaches the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5.

The plurality of variation effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. This multiple variation effect can be executed during a variation effect of a decorative pattern over a plurality of variations (including a reach effect (super reach effect)).

[Multiple fluctuation production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of variation effects A.
In the multiple variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the variation meter display effect is executed. In this fluctuation meter display effect, the hold icon E3 and the meter image E3C are displayed. The hold icon E3 is composed of a first hold icon E3B (up to eight) representing hold and a second hold icon E3A representing the hold. For the sake of simplicity, only the first hold icon (up to four) corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 is shown in the figure among the first hold icons E3B. That is, in the figure, the first hold icon E3B corresponds to the hold image 9A. Hereinafter, the same applies to the multiple variation effect.

The meter image E3C is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E3C is vertically arranged at the right end of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the variation point giving effect is executed. The fluctuation point giving effect is an effect executed during the same variation effect as the variation meter display effect described above, and the hold icon E3, the meter image E3C, and the point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The variable point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times during the same variable effect. The point acquisition image E3D is an image suggesting that a predetermined point has been given, in other words, that the player has acquired a predetermined point. In the point acquisition image E3D of FIG. 96 (B), it is shown that 2 points (2P) have been given to the player (the player has acquired 2 points). Further, in the meter image E3C, it is shown that the meter area for the points is enlarged and the meter value is increased as compared with the time of the fluctuation meter display effect due to the points being given. The meter value of the meter image E3C increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3C represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. The variable point giving effect is reach effect, super reach effect, chance up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect), jackpot notice effect, reach development destination advance notice effect, hold change notice, look-ahead effect, hold expectation degree suggestion effect, or , Pseudo-continuous production and the like can be started according to the execution of various effects. Further, the next variation point giving effect, which will be described later, can also be executed in response to the execution of these various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the next fluctuation point giving effect is executed. The next fluctuation point giving effect is an effect executed during the next variation effect of the above-mentioned fluctuation meter display effect and the variation (the variation) in which the variation point giving effect is executed, and is the hold icon E3 and the meter. The image E3C and the point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The next variation point granting effect can be executed multiple times during the same variation effect. In the point acquisition image E3D shown in FIG. 96 (C), it is shown that 5 points (5P) have been given to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). Further, in the meter image E3C, it is shown that the meter area for the points is expanded and the meter value is increased as compared with the time of the fluctuation point giving effect due to the points being given.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the button pressing effect is executed. This button pressing effect is an effect executed during the same variation effect as the next variation point giving effect described above, and the button image E3E, the hold icon E3, and the meter image E3C are displayed. The button image E3E is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image E3E is an image represented by "PUSH" in the image and representing a state as if it is lit. Further, adjacent to the button image E3E, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the valid operation period has passed. Further, the meter value of the meter image E3C in FIG. 96 (D) represents the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the hold icon E3 and the chance-up image E3F are displayed. The chance-up image E3F is an image suggesting a chance-up, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E3F of FIG. 96 (E), the characters "It's super hot !!" are expressed, which suggests that the expectation of the big hit is high. The chance-up image E3F is represented as a statement by the ally character CRA.

[Multiple fluctuation production B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of variation effects B.
In the multiple variation effect B, as shown in FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (E), the variation meter display effect, the variation point giving effect, the next variation point giving effect, the button pressing effect, and the chance up effect are performed. Will be executed. Each of these effects is basically the fluctuation meter display effect shown in FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (E), the variation point giving effect, the next variation point giving effect, the button pressing effect, and the chance-up effect. However, the multiple variation effect B is different in that the button image E3G is displayed in the variation meter display effect, the variation point giving effect, and the next variation point giving effect. This button image E3G is an image that is arranged substantially in the center of the display screen 7a and suggests the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on.

[Multiple fluctuation production C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of variation effects C.
As shown in FIG. 98A, the plurality fluctuation effect C is executed with the variation meter display effect. In this fluctuation meter display effect, the hold icon E3 similar to FIG. 96 (A), the button image E3G similar to FIG. 97 (A), and the meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area, and the area in which the button image E3G is displayed (inside the button image E3G). Is placed in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the variation point giving effect is executed. The variation point giving effect is an effect executed during the same variation effect as the above-mentioned variation meter display effect, and has the same hold icon E3 as in FIG. 96 (B) and the same points as in FIG. 96 (B). The acquired image E3D, the button image E3G similar to that shown in FIG. 97 (B), and the meter image E3H are displayed. This variation point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times during the same variation effect. In the meter image E3H, it is shown that the meter area for the points is enlarged and the meter value is increased as compared with the time of the fluctuation meter display effect due to the points being given. The meter value of the meter image E3H increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3H represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the next fluctuation point giving effect is executed. The next fluctuation point giving effect is an effect executed during the next variation effect of the above-mentioned fluctuation meter display effect and the variation (the variation) in which the variation point giving effect is executed. A similar hold icon E3, a point acquisition image E3D similar to FIG. 96 (C), a button image E3G similar to FIG. 97 (C), and a meter image E3H are displayed. This next variation point giving effect can be executed a plurality of times during the same variation effect. In the meter image E3H, it is shown that the meter area for the points is expanded and the meter value is increased as compared with the time when the fluctuation points are given.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the button pressing effect is executed. This button pressing effect is an effect executed during the same variation effect as the above-mentioned next variation point giving effect, and has the same button image E3E as in FIG. 96 (D) and the hold icon E3 similar to FIG. 96 (D). And the meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is displayed in the area where the button image E3E is displayed (inside the button image E3E). The meter value of the meter image E3H in FIG. 98 (D) represents the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the hold icon E3, the button image E3G, the meter image E3H, and the timer image E3I are displayed. The timer image E3I is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image E3I shown in FIG. 98 (E), "100 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer. This timer image E3I is displayed adjacent to the button image E3G. When the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes "0 seconds", a predetermined effect, for example, a chance-up effect as shown in FIG. 97 (E) may be executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the multiple variation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the plurality of variation effects A to C, the point-giving effect is executed over a plurality of continuous variation effects, that is, the plurality of variation effects are generated. A predetermined point is acquired across the board, and meter images E3C and E3H showing the cumulative value (cumulative point) of the acquired points are displayed. When the meter value (cumulative point) of the meter image reaches the maximum (MAX), the button pressing effect in which the button image E3E prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed is executed. According to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player, a chance-up effect, a timer display effect, and the like are executed. According to this configuration, even if the accumulated points do not reach the maximum (MAX) in one variation effect, the points are taken over to the next variation effect, so that the player can straddle a plurality of variation effects. You can enjoy the production of earning points. Further, when the cumulative points acquired over the plurality of variable effects are maximized (MAX), the button pressing effect is executed, so that the button pressing effect can be made to stand out. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 to 98, in the plurality of variation effects B and C, the point giving effect is executed over a plurality of continuous variation effects, that is, the plurality of variation effects are generated. A predetermined point is acquired across the board, and meter images E3C and E3H showing the cumulative value (cumulative point) of the acquired points are displayed. When the meter images E3C and E3H are displayed, the button image E3G is displayed. According to this configuration, since the execution of the button effect using the effect button 63 can be predicted by accumulating the points, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the plurality of fluctuation effects C, the meter image E3H representing the cumulative value (cumulative points) of the acquired points is the area (button image) in which the button image E3G is displayed. It is placed in E3G). According to this configuration, the player can associate a button effect using the effect button 63 in connection with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great expectation regarding the button effect, and other effects other than the button effect are provided in relation to the meter display. If done, it can give the player a sense of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 97, in the multiple variation effects A and B, after the button pressing effect, a chance-up effect, which is an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation, is executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect that suggests the jackpot expectation is executed based on the points accumulated over multiple fluctuation effects, so that the chance-up effect suggests that the jackpot expectation is high. Can raise expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effect C, the timer display effect is executed after the button press effect. According to this configuration, the timer display effect is executed based on the points accumulated over the plurality of variable effects, so that the effect with high expectation of big hit when the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes 0 seconds. Can increase the expectation that will be executed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple fluctuation effects A to C, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect has the maximum meter value (MAX) of the meter images E3C and E3H. Sometimes executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed as compared with the case where the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are predetermined values before the maximum (MAX). It is possible to increase the expectation for a big hit when it develops into a timer display effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the multiple variation effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the point-giving effect or the next variation point is given as a part of the look-ahead effect (continuous effect over a plurality of variations). A configuration in which points are given in the staging (a configuration in which points are acquired across a plurality of variable staging as part of the look-ahead staging) may be used. According to this configuration, each time points are earned, the expectation for a big hit can be increased, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, the cumulative points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H in the multiple fluctuation effects A to C, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the cumulative points may be represented by numbers instead of meter values. Further, the accumulated points may be suggested by expressing the remaining points until the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, a button image is displayed when a chance-up effect or a timer display effect is performed in the multiple variation effects A to C, and the chance-up effect or the timer is displayed. The display effect may be executed in the button image. Further, the point acquisition image E3D may be displayed in the button image.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the plurality of fluctuation effects A to C, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the fluctuation meter display effect, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are predetermined values (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area is reduced and the meter value is lowered by the point addition by the point assignment effect. It may be configured. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96 (C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 98 (C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the plurality of fluctuation effects A to C, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are configured to increase by giving points. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points by the point awarding effect, the meter area may be expanded and the meter value may be increased by executing a predetermined operation. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96 (C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 98 (C) are executed. In addition, "the predetermined operation has been executed" means, for example, that the pseudo-continuous execution has been executed, the hold icon has changed (the hold change display has been performed), and the predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. It includes things that have been done, successes in certain challenges (games), and so on.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple fluctuation effects A to C, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are the maximum values (MAX) for the chance-up effect and the timer display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are the maximum values (MAX) but when the predetermined values are smaller than the maximum values. As the predetermined value, for example, it may be a value of half of the meter value or a value of 1/4. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the timer image E3I is displayed in the multiple variation effect C by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the timer image E3I may be displayed in a count-up method in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the value reaches a predetermined value, the button pressing effect described above can be executed. Further, a plurality of timer images E3I may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the plurality of variation effects A to C are executed during a plurality of continuous variation effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the plurality of variation effects A to C may be executed for one variation effect.

[Modification 9]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the plurality of fluctuation effects A to C, a chance-up effect or a timer display effect is executed after the button pressing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button pressing is not limited to this. After the production, another production may be executed. Other productions include pseudo-continuous production, reach production, super reach production, chance-up production (big hit expectation suggestion production), jackpot notice production, reach development destination notice production, hold change notice, or look-ahead start notice. The structure may be such that the effect can be executed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E3-1]
A symbol display means capable of performing a symbol variation display that stops the symbol after starting the variable display, and
An effect display means that can execute multiple types of display effects,
An operation unit that can be operated by the player,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of acquiring predetermined points over a plurality of consecutive times of the symbol variation display and performing a point suggestion display suggesting the accumulated points acquired.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the operation unit representing the operation unit and displaying the image of the first operation unit that urges the player to operate the operation unit.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the cumulative points in the first display effect reach a predetermined value, the second display effect is performed, and the player operates the operation unit. Depending on the situation, the prescribed production will be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E3-2]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the second operation unit representing the operation unit.
The combination effect is an effect that may include a third display effect.
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed while the first display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1.
[Aspect E3-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the first display effect may be performed in the area where the second operation unit image in the third display effect is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2.
[Aspect E3-4]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a display suggesting a jackpot expectation degree.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3.
[Aspect E3-5]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a timer display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-4.
[Aspect E3-6]
Equipped with a look-ahead effect execution means that can execute a look-ahead effect
In the first display effect, a predetermined point is acquired over a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays as the look-ahead effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-5.
[Aspect E3-7]
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, it is when the cumulative point reaches the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-6.

The operation charge effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. This operation charge effect is performed in parallel with the variable effect of the decorative pattern. Of course, it includes the execution of reach production (super reach production).

[Operation charge production A (success)]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect A (success).
First, in the operation charge effect A (success), as shown in FIG. 99 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. Further, at the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), the sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG that moves downward in the sword move effect stops.

The handle of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas. Specifically, it is divided into six adjacent regions of regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing colors of these areas R1 to R6 are initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the drawing color of the area R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Then, the drawing color is changed from blue to red in a predetermined order in the order of region R2 → R3 → R4 → R5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the charge effect (final stage) is executed. In the charge effect (final stage), the drawing color of the area R6 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the change in the drawing color of the area R5 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the button pressing instruction effect is executed. In the button pressing instruction effect, an image instructing the pressing of the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, the text image TG "Press!" Is displayed together with the arrow image YG instructing the button image BG to be pressed.

[Operation charge production A (failure)]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect A (failure).
First, in the operation charge effect A (failure), as shown in FIG. 100 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. Further, at the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, the sword image KG showing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG that moves downward in the sword move effect stops.

The handle of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas. Specifically, it is divided into six adjacent regions of regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing colors of these areas R1 to R6 are initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the charge effect (initial) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the drawing color of the area R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Next, the drawing color of the region R2 is changed from blue to red.
The fluctuation start effect, sword movement effect, sword stop effect, and charge effect (initial) of FIGS. 100 (A) to 100 (D) are the same as the operation charge effect (success) shown in FIG. 99. It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), the charge effect (mid-term) is executed. In the charge effect (mid-term), the drawing color of the area R3 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the change in the drawing color of the area R2 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the fluctuation continuation effect is executed. In the fluctuation continuation effect, the sword image KG is not displayed, and the effect is the same as the variation start effect shown in FIG. 100 (A). That is, when the region R3 changes from blue to red, the charge effect is interrupted and the same effect as the variation start effect is performed.

[Operation charge effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the operation charge effect B.
First, in the operation charge effect B, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. Further, at the lower part of the screen, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested images 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the charge notice effect is executed. In the charge notice effect, the charge notice image is displayed with the button image BB1 indicating the effect button 63 displayed. Here, it is shown that the elliptical charge notice image JG1 marked with "C" is displayed. The button image BB1 has five regions S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), the charge effect is executed. In the charge effect, the drawing color of the area of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red, triggered by the appearance of the charge advance image in the charge advance effect described above. Here, the state in which the region S1 has changed from blue to red is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the charge notice effect is executed. The charge advance notice effect is the effect described with reference to FIG. 101 (B), and here, an elliptical charge advance notice image JG2 marked with “C × 4” is displayed. In addition to the charge image "C", "Cx2", "Cx3", "Cx4", and "Cx5" are prepared as the charge notice image. The number of regions that can be changed from blue to red is determined by the numerical value written after the "x".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the charge effect is executed. The charge effect is the effect described with reference to FIG. 101 (C), and the drawing color of the area of the button image BB1 is changed from blue to red when the charge notice image appears. Here, the four regions S2 to S5 are changed from blue to red in correspondence with the charge notice image JG2 of “C × 4”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the button pressing instruction effect is executed. In the button pressing instruction effect, an image instructing the pressing of the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, the text image TG "Press!" Is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect in this embodiment is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of areas, and the drawing colors of these areas are changed from blue to red in a predetermined order. When the drawing color of all areas is changed to red, the button pressing instruction effect is executed. According to this configuration, the change in the drawing color leads to the expectation of the player, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 (B) and 101 (D), a charge notice image is displayed as a charge notice effect. Taking the display of the charge notice image as an opportunity, the charge effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 101 (C) and 101 (E). That is, the plurality of regions S1 to S5 are changed from blue to red in a predetermined order. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by displaying the charge notice image, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the charge notice image JG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (B), as shown in FIG. 101 (C), in the charge effect, one area S1 is drawn. The color is changed from blue to red. On the other hand, when the charge notice image JG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the drawing colors of the two or more regions S2 to S5 are changed from blue to red as shown in FIG. 101 (E). Be done. According to this configuration, the player's expectation can be different depending on the type of charge notice image, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of adjacent regions R1 to R6. According to this configuration, the charge effect becomes easy to understand, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when all the drawing colors of the areas R1 to R6 turn red as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the button pressing instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99 (F). Will be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), if the drawing colors of the areas R1 to R3 are red but the areas R4 to R6 are blue, the button pressing instruction effect is not executed. According to this configuration, expectations are raised as to whether or not the charge production will be successful, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
A modified example of this embodiment is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, when the drawing colors of all the regions R1 to R6 of the sword image KG turn red, the button pressing instruction effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, when the drawing colors of all the areas B1 to B5 of the button image BB1 become red, the button pressing instruction effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button pressing instruction effect may be executed when the drawing color of a part of the area becomes red.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the handle portion of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of regions S1 to S6, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the entire sword image KG may be divided into a plurality of areas.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the drawing color of the area is changed from blue to red, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a wireframe-like display is performed so that the color of the area is the same as the background color, and the drawing color of the area of the wireframe-like image is changed (color is painted). good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E4-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an image of the operation means.
The image of the operating means has a plurality of areas and has a plurality of areas.
By changing the drawing colors of the plurality of regions from the first drawing color to the second drawing color in a predetermined order, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of transition of the operating means to the operable state. A game machine to be.
[Aspect E4-2]
It is possible to display a specific image at a predetermined timing during fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized in that, triggered by the display of the specific image, the drawing colors of the plurality of areas are changed from the first drawing color to the second drawing color in a predetermined order.
[Aspect E4-3]
When the first specific image of the specific image is displayed, the drawing color of one of the plurality of areas is changed, and when the second specific image of the specific image is displayed, the plurality of areas are displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the drawing color of two or more areas of the above area is changed.
[Aspect E4-4]
An image of the operating means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is divided into a plurality of adjacent areas.
[Aspect E4-5]
When all the drawing colors of the plurality of regions become the second drawing color, the operating means becomes operable, and when the drawing colors of the plurality of regions include a region other than the second drawing color, the operating means causes the operating means. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not become operable.

Pseudo-continuous point production will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 103. This pseudo continuous point effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (during one variation effect) (for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol or during the reach effect (super reach effect)).

[Pseudo-ream point production A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous point effect A.
In the pseudo-continuous point effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream suggestion image E5A and the meter image E5B are displayed. The pseudo-ream suggestion image E5A is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-ream effect, and more specifically, “pseudo × 2” suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect is the second time is shown. Further, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are temporarily stopped at a logo symbol suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the mode of "7, logo symbol, 7". The meter image E5B is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E5B is arranged vertically at the right end of the display screen 7a. The pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again after the point-giving effect.

The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the fluctuation change, during the reach effect, and the like. Along with a production that repeats the production of temporarily stopping at least a part, a production that repeats the production of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of pseudo-ream such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo". Includes an effect of executing a variable effect of a decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the point awarding effect is executed. This point-giving effect is executed in response to the execution of the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, and the meter image E5B and the point acquisition image E5C are displayed. This point-giving effect can be executed when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed again during the same variable effect, or in response to another effect. That is, the point-giving effect can be executed a plurality of times during the same variable effect. The point acquisition image E5C is an image suggesting that a predetermined point has been given, in other words, that the player has acquired a predetermined point. In the point acquisition image E5C of FIG. 102 (B), it is shown that 5 points (5P) have been given to the player (the player has acquired 5 points). Further, in the meter image E5B, it is shown that the meter area for the points is expanded and the meter value is increased as compared with the time of the fluctuation meter display effect due to the points being given. The meter value of the meter image E5B increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the button pressing effect is executed. The button image E5D and the meter image E5B are displayed for this button pressing effect. The button image E5D is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image E5D is an image represented by "PUSH" in the image and representing a state as if it is lit. Further, adjacent to the button image E5D, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the valid operation period has passed. Further, the meter image E5B in FIG. 102 (C) shows that the meter value is the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the chance-up effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the effective operation period. In this chance-up effect, the chance-up image E5E is displayed. The chance-up image E5E is an image suggesting a chance-up, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E5E of FIG. 102 (D), the characters "It's super hot !!" are expressed, which suggests that the expectation of the big hit is high. The chance-up image E5E is represented as a statement by the ally character CRA.

[Pseudo-ream point production B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous point effect B.
As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the pseudo-continuous point effect B is executed. In this pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream suggestion image E5A, the button image E5G, and the meter image E5F similar to those in FIG. 102 (A) are displayed. The button image E5G is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on. The meter image E5F is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area. Further, the meter image E5F is arranged sideways in the area where the button image E5G is displayed (inside the button image E5G). Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are temporarily stopped at a logo symbol suggesting a pseudo continuous effect, as in FIG. 102 (A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the mode of "7, logo symbol, 7". The pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again after the point-giving effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the point awarding effect is executed. This point-giving effect is executed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect described above, and the button image E5G, the meter image E5F, and the point acquisition image E5C similar to FIG. 102 (B) are displayed. This point-giving effect may be executed again when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed again during the same variable effect, or in response to another effect. That is, the point-giving effect can be executed a plurality of times. Further, in the meter image E5F arranged in the button image E5G, it is shown that the meter area for the points is expanded and the meter value is increased as compared with the time of the fluctuation meter display effect due to the points being given. ing. The meter value of the meter image E5F increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5F represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the button pressing effect is executed. As for this button pressing effect, the button image E5D and the meter image E5F similar to those in FIG. 102 (C) are displayed. The meter image E5F is arranged in the area where the button image E5D is displayed, that is, in the button image E5D. Further, the meter image E5F in FIG. 103 (C) shows that the meter value is the maximum (MAX). The button image E5D has the same shape as the button image E5G.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the timer display effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the effective operation period. In this timer display effect, the button image E3G, the meter image E5F, and the timer image E5H similar to those in FIG. 103 (A) are displayed. The timer image E5H is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image E5H shown in FIG. 103 (D), "100 seconds" as the initial value of the timer is shown. This timer image E5H is displayed adjacent to the button image E5G. When the timer value of the timer image E5H becomes "0 seconds", a predetermined effect, for example, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102 (D) or the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed again.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pseudo-ream point effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, the pseudo-ream effect is executed in the pseudo-ream point effects A and B, and the cumulative value (cumulative points) of the points given in the point-giving effect. Is expressed using the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F, the button image E5D is displayed according to the maximum meter value (MAX), and the chance is increased when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. The effect and timer display effect are executed. According to this configuration, points are accumulated according to the realization of the pseudo continuous effect, and when the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX), effects such as a chance-up effect and a timer display effect can be executed. It can be made more interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a configuration in which the meter image E5F is displayed in the pseudo-ream point effect B during the pseudo-ream effect, the point-giving effect, and the like. According to this configuration, it is possible to predict the execution of the button effect using the effect button 63 during the pseudo-continuous effect or the point-giving effect, so that the player can be given an exciting feeling and the interest of the game is improved. Can be made to.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effect AB, the meter image E5F suggesting the cumulative points is arranged in the area where the button image E5G is displayed (inside the button image E5G). To. According to this configuration, the player can associate a button effect using the effect button 63 in connection with the meter display. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed in relation to the meter display, it is possible to give the player a great expectation regarding the button effect, and other effects other than the button effect are provided in relation to the meter display. If done, it can give the player a sense of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, in the pseudo-continuous point effect A, after the button press effect, a chance-up effect, which is an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation, is executed. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect that suggests the jackpot expectation is executed based on the points given by the pseudo-continuous effect, so that the chance-up effect is expected to give a suggestion that the jackpot expectation is high. Can be enhanced. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effect B, a timer display effect is executed after the button press effect. According to this configuration, the timer display effect is executed based on the points given by the pseudo continuous effect, so that the effect with high expectation of big hit is executed when the timer value of the timer image E5H becomes 0 seconds. You can raise your expectations for things. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect has the maximum meter value (MAX) of the meter images E5B and E5G. Is executed when. According to this configuration, the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed as compared with the case where the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5G are predetermined values before the maximum (MAX). It is possible to increase the expectation for a big hit when it develops into a timer display effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pseudo-continuous point effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX) in the pseudo-continuous staging A and B, the button pressing staging is performed. The present invention is not limited to this, although the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed in response to the execution and the player pressing the effect button 63. For example, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are maximized (MAX), the chance-up effect or the timer display effect may be executed without the player pressing the effect button 63. Further, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are maximized (MAX), the button pressing effect is not executed (the button image E5D is not displayed), and the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed. May be good.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, the cumulative points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F in the pseudo-continuous point staging A and B. It is not limited. For example, the cumulative points may be represented by numbers instead of meter values. Further, the accumulated points may be suggested by expressing the remaining points until the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, a button image is displayed when a chance-up effect or a timer display effect is performed in the pseudo-ream point effects A and B, and the chance-up effect and the chance-up effect are performed. The timer display effect may be executed in the button image. Further, the point acquisition image E5C may be displayed in the button image.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are configured to increase by giving points. , The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the pseudo continuous effect, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are predetermined values (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area is reduced and the meter value is lowered by the point addition by the point assignment effect. May be good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102 (C) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 103 (C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are configured to increase by giving points. , The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points by the point awarding effect, the meter area may be expanded and the meter value may be increased by executing a predetermined operation. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102 (C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 103 (C) are executed. In addition, "the predetermined operation has been executed" means, for example, that the pseudo-continuous execution has been executed, the hold icon has changed (the hold change display has been performed), and the predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. It includes things that have been done, successes in certain challenges (games), and so on.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, the maximum value (MAX) of the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F is used for the chance-up effect and the timer display effect. ), But the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are the maximum values (MAX) but when the predetermined values are smaller than the maximum values. As the predetermined value, for example, it may be a value of half of the meter value or a value of 1/4. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be added to the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo-continuous point effect B, the timer image E5H is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the timer image E5H may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the value reaches a predetermined value, the button pressing effect described above can be executed. Further, a plurality of timer images E5H may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo-ream point effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pseudo-ream point effect A. , B may be executed during a plurality of consecutive variation effects.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the pseudo-continuous point effects A and B, a chance-up effect or a timer display effect is executed after the button press effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the button pressing effect, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed again. Further, after the button pressing effect, another effect may be executed after the button pressing effect. As other effects, various effects such as reach effect, super reach effect, chance up effect (big hit expectation suggestion effect), big hit notice effect, reach development destination notice effect, hold change notice, or look-ahead start notice are executed. The configuration may be obtained.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E5-1]
An effect display means that can execute multiple types of display effects,
An operation unit that can be operated by the player,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a pseudo-continuous effect.
The second display effect is an effect of giving a certain point and performing a point suggestion display suggesting the cumulative points of the given points.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the operation unit representing the operation unit and displaying the image of the first operation unit that urges the player to operate the operation unit.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the certain points are given according to the first display effect, and the point suggestion display is displayed. After that, the third display effect is performed according to the cumulative points reaching a predetermined value, and when the player operates the operation unit, the predetermined effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E5-2]
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying an image of a second operation unit representing the operation unit.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect may be performed when the first display effect is performed or when the second display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-1.
[Aspect E5-3]
In the combination effect, the point suggestion display in the second display effect may be performed in the area where the second operation unit image in the fourth display effect is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-2.
[Aspect E5-4]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a display suggesting a jackpot expectation degree.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-3.
[Aspect E5-5]
The predetermined effect is an effect including a timer display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-4.
[Aspect E5-6]
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, it is when the cumulative point reaches the maximum value.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-5.

The timer freeze effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. This timer freeze effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol, for example, at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, at the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, or during the reach effect (super reach effect).

[Timer freeze effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect A.
First, in the timer freeze effect A, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the timer image I1A is displayed. The timer image I1A is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image I1A shown in FIG. 104 (A), "100 seconds" as the initial value of the timer is shown. In the timer display effect, the ally character CRA is also displayed. In the display effect shown below, the description of the ally character CRA is omitted unless it is particularly necessary. Further, in the upper right of FIG. 104 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbols and the decorative symbols 8C are changing, that is, it is shown that they are in the reach state. .. In the following, when it is shown that such a reach state is obtained, the description thereof will be omitted when it is not particularly necessary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the timer stop effect is executed. In the timer stop effect, the effect that the timer value of the timer image I1A stops at "77.7 seconds" is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the jackpot notification effect of reflecting the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect in the symbol array of the decorative symbols and notifying it as the jackpot symbol array is executed.

[Timer freeze effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect B.
First, in the timer freeze effect B, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the timer image I1A and the button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on. The timer image I1A is the same as the timer image I1A of FIG. 104 (A), the timer value is displayed by a countdown method, and "100 seconds" as the initial value of the timer is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, the button image I1C and the timer image I1A are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I1C is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image showing a state in which the color of the button image I1B is darkened and / or a state in which the button image I1B is lit. Is. Further, adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The timer image I1A shows "80 seconds", indicating that the effective operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 105 (C), the timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, the timer value of the timer image I1A is stopped in 77.7 seconds in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by the button effective display effect. Since the button effective display effect starts from the timer value of 80 seconds, the effect button 63 can be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 79 seconds). In this case, the timer value ( For example, 79 seconds) is fluctuated at high speed and stopped at "77.7 seconds". Not limited to this, the timer value may be stopped at 77.7 seconds at once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), similarly to FIG. 104 (C), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the symbol array of the decorative symbols, and the jackpot is notified as the jackpot symbol array. The notification effect is executed.

[Timer freeze effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the timer freeze effect C.
First, in the timer freeze effect C, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the timer image I1D and the button image I1B are displayed. Similar to FIG. 105 (A), the button image I1B is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on. In the timer image I1D, the timer value is displayed in a count-up manner, and "0 second" is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the button effective display effect is executed. In the button effective display effect, the button image I1C and the timer image I1D are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, as in FIG. 105 (B), in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Further, adjacent to the button image I1C, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The timer image I1D shows "75 seconds", indicating that the effective operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 starts from 75 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 106 (C), the timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop effect, the timer value of the timer image I1A is stopped in 77.7 seconds in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by the button effective display effect. Since the button effective display effect starts from the timer value of 75 seconds, the effect button 63 can be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 76 seconds). In this case, the timer value ( For example, 76 seconds) is fluctuated at high speed and stopped at "77.7 seconds". Not limited to this, the timer value may be stopped at 77.7 seconds at once.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), similarly to FIG. 105 (D), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the symbol array of the decorative symbols, and the jackpot is notified as the jackpot symbol array. The notification effect is executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer freeze effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, timer display (display of timer image) is executed, and the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). The display to notify is executed, and the display to notify the jackpot is executed using the stopped timer value. According to this configuration, the player can be made to feel unexpected and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed when the timer display is being executed, and the timer is responded to when the player operates the effect button 63. A display for stopping (stopping) the display timer value at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed, and a display for notifying a jackpot is executed using the stopped timer value. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and to give a feeling of participating in the game, and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, when the timer stop effect is displayed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). When the timer value becomes a value (80 seconds or 75 seconds) before the predetermined value (77.7 seconds), the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is started, and the effect button 63 is within the effective operation period. When there is an operation of, the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected, and it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the staging button 63, and it is possible to improve the participation rate in the game. As a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, a big hit is made after the timer stop effect is displayed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). In the notification effect, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols is set to be the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped by the timer stop effect, so that the jackpot is notified. According to this configuration, the player can be made to feel unexpected and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, a display is made in which the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) which is doublet in the timer stop effect. After that, in the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot is notified by making the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) that is doublet stopped by the timer stop effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the big hit in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can quickly recognize the big hit. As a result, the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer freeze effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed when the timer display is being executed, and the player operates the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I1C. In response to this, the display that stops (stops) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed, and the display that notifies the jackpot using the stopped timer value is executed. The invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the button image I1C is displayed and the player does not operate the effect button 63, a display for stopping (stopping) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed. Then, the display notifying the jackpot may be executed by using the stopped timer value.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, a big hit is made after the timer stop effect is displayed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). In the notification effect, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols is the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped by the timer stop effect to notify the jackpot, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the timer value (77.7 seconds) of the timer display stopped in the timer stop effect may be used as it is to notify the jackpot.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is 77.7, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, other doublets such as 11.1, 111, 33.3 may be used. Further, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is not limited to doublet, and may be a predetermined value such as 135.
[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be the number of seconds obtained by subtracting the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect described later from the start seconds of the effective operation period. For example, when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds and the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is 77.7 seconds, 2.3 seconds may be set as the effective operation period.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer freeze effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed at the same time. May be good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect I1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display.
In the first aspect, the above indication may be displayed,
In the second aspect, the above indication may be displayed,
In the third aspect, the above-mentioned display may be displayed, and the above-mentioned indication may be displayed.
The display of the first aspect is a display of an aspect including a display of counting timer values using a timer image.
The display in the second aspect includes a display in which the timer value of the timer image is stopped by the first predetermined value.
The display of the third aspect is a display of an aspect including a display suggesting a jackpot using a timer value of a timer image.
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the first aspect, then displayed in the second aspect, and then displayed in the third aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect I1-2]
It is equipped with an operation unit that can accept the player's operation and execute a predetermined effect by the player's operation.
The above-mentioned display may be displayed in the fourth aspect.
The display of the fourth aspect is a display of an aspect including the display of an operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit.
The certain display is displayed in the fourth aspect when it is displayed in the first aspect, and the player operates the operation unit by displaying the operation unit image in the fourth aspect. It is a display which is displayed in the second aspect according to the situation, and may be displayed in the third aspect after being displayed in the second aspect.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-1.

[Aspect 3]
When the display of the second aspect is made in the certain display, the operation of the operation unit is effective when the timer value becomes the second predetermined value before the first predetermined value. When the period is started and the operation unit is operated within the operation valid period, the timer value is stopped by the first predetermined value.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I1-2.

[Aspect 4]
The third aspect is a display suggesting a big hit using a decorative pattern.
When the display of the third aspect is made after the display of the second aspect is made in the certain display, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol is stopped in the second aspect. By making it the same as the predetermined value of 1, it suggests a big hit.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I1-1 to I1-3.

[Aspect 5]
The symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol which is the same as the first predetermined value stopped in the second aspect is doublet.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I4-1.

The chance up meter effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. This chance-up meter effect is during a jackpot game, during a decorative symbol variation effect (for example, at the start of a special symbol variation display, at the start of a decorative symbol variation effect, or during a reach effect (super reach effect)). Can be executed.

[Chance up meter production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect A.
In the chance up meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the chance up meter image I2A and the timer image I2B are displayed. The chance-up meter image I2A includes a meter image I2AA, a cursor image I2A1, a chance-up suggested image I2A2, and a chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3. The meter image I2AA is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Indicates the period of chance up meter production. The chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is arranged on the meter image I2AA. When the cursor image I2A1 moves and the cursor image I2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3, the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is changed to the chance-up completion suggestion image I2A2. The chance-up suggested image I2A2 is arranged on the meter image I2AA, and suggests that the chance-up effect has been executed at that timing.

That is, in the meter image I2AA, the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3, thereby representing the period from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

The timer image I2B is displayed during the display of the chance up meter image I2A. For example, the timer image I2B is displayed at the start of the chance-up meter effect or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up suggested image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2B, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and 15 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 107 (B) or the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 107 (B), in the timing match display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds. An effect is performed to show that and match. The timing match display effect is not limited to this, and the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example,). It may be an effect indicating that the timing of (7.77 seconds) coincides.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the high expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the high expectation chance up production, the high expectation chance up image I2C is displayed. The high expectation chance up image I2C is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively high.

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 107 (D), the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds are different. An effect is performed to indicate that they do not match. The timing mismatch display effect is not limited to this, and the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are predetermined values (for example,). It may be an effect indicating that the timing of (7.77 seconds) does not match.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (E), the low expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the low expectation chance up production, the low expectation chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation chance-up image I2D is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. That is, when the low expectation chance up image I2D appears, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the high expectation chance up image I2C appears.

[Chance up meter production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect B.
In the chance up meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the chance up meter image I2A, the timer image I2B, and the button image I2E are displayed. Since the chance up meter image I2A and the timer image I2B are the same as those in FIG. 107 (A), the description thereof will be omitted. The button image I2E is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 108 (B) or the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 108 (D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 108 (B), in the timing match display effect, as in FIG. 107 (B), the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer image I2B An effect indicating that the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 seconds in the above coincides with that of 0 seconds is performed.

In addition, the button image I2F is displayed. The button image I2F is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I2F is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image showing a state in which the color of the button image I2E is darkened and / or a state in which the button image I2E is lit. Is. Further, adjacent to the button image I2F, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63. The button image I2F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image I2B becomes "0 seconds". Not limited to this, it may be displayed after the timer value becomes a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before becoming “0 seconds”. The effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), the high expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the high expectation chance up effect, the high expectation chance up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I2F. The high expectation chance up image I2C is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, as in FIG. 107 (C).

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 108 (D), similarly to FIG. 107 (D), the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer in the timer image I2B. An effect is performed to indicate that the timing at which the value becomes 0 seconds does not match. In addition, the button image I2F is displayed. The button image I2F is the same image as in FIG. 108 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (E), the low expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the low expectation chance up production, the low expectation chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation chance-up image I2D is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, as in FIG. 108 (E).

[Chance up meter production C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect C.
In the chance up meter effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the chance up meter image I2A, the timer image I2G, and the button image I2E are displayed. Since the chance up meter image I2A and the button image I2E are the same as those in FIG. 108 (A), the description thereof will be omitted. The timer image I2G is displayed during the display of the chance up meter image I2A. For example, the timer image I2G is displayed at the start of the chance-up meter effect or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up suggested image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2G, the timer value is displayed in a count-up manner, and 0 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 109 (B) or the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 109 (D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 109 (B), in the timing match display effect, the button image I2H is displayed when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds). The button image I2H is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I2H is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image showing a state in which the color of the button image I2E is darkened and / or a state in which the button image I2E is lit. Is. Further, adjacent to the button image I2H, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63.
Then, in the timing match display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value and the button image I2H is displayed. Indicates that they match.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the high expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the high expectation chance up effect, the high expectation chance up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 by displaying the button image I2H. The high expectation chance up image I2C is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, as in FIG. 107 (C).

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 109 (D), the button image I2H is displayed when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds) as in FIG. 109 (B). Then, in the timing mismatch display effect, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value of the timer image I2G becomes a predetermined value and the button image I2H is displayed. Indicates that they do not match.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), the low expectation chance-up effect is executed. In the low expectation chance up production, the low expectation chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation chance-up image I2D is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, as in FIG. 107 (E).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the chance up meter effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a configuration in which a timer display (display of a timer image) is executed while the chance up meter image I2A is being displayed (chance up meter effect). ing. According to this configuration, since the display dealing with two different types of time is made, the player can have a sense of expectation with the passage of time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image become predetermined values. A high-expectation chance-up effect or a low-expectation chance-up effect may be executed based on the timing. According to this configuration, the high-expectation chance-up effect can be executed based on the display dealing with two different types of time, so that the player can have a greater sense of expectation due to the progress of these displays. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image become predetermined values. When the timing is the same, the high-expectation chance-up effect may be executed. According to this configuration, when the displays dealing with two different types of time are synchronized, the high expectation chance-up effect can be executed, so that the player can have a greater sense of expectation due to the progress of these displays. can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image become predetermined values. If the timing does not match, the low expectation chance-up effect may be executed. According to this configuration, when the displays dealing with two different types of time are not synchronized, the low expectation chance-up effect can be executed, so that the player has a greater sense of expectation due to the progress of these displays. Can be done. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 109, when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value in the timing match display effect or the timing mismatch display effect, the effect button 63 is given to the player. The button image I2H that promotes the pressing of is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the feeling of participating in the game, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the chance up meter effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the chance up meter display and the timer display are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a chance up meter display and other display indicating the passage of time may be executed. Here, the other display indicating the passage of time may be, for example, a meter or an indicator indicating time.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer image in the timing match display effect. The present invention is not limited to this, although the high expectation chance-up effect is executed when the timing at which the timer value becomes a predetermined value coincides with the timing. For example, when the timings match, various effects such as a pseudo continuous effect, an effect indicating the type of reach, and a notice suggesting that the effect will develop into a super reach effect may be executed. In this case, as the effect after the timing mismatch display effect, an effect different from these effects may be executed. Also in this case, as the effect executed when the timings match, an effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the effect executed when the timings do not match is selected.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance-up meter image I2A and the timer image in the timing mismatch display effect. The present invention is not limited to this, although the low expectation chance-up effect is executed when the timing at which the timer value becomes a predetermined value does not match. For example, when the timings do not match, various effects such as a pseudo continuous effect, an effect indicating the type of reach, and a notice suggesting that the effect will develop into a super reach effect may be executed. In this case, as the effect after the timing matching display effect, an effect different from these effects may be executed. Also in this case, as the effect executed when the timings do not match, an effect having a lower expectation of a big hit than the effect executed when the timings match is selected.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the chance up meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed at the same time. You may.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the high-expectation chance-up image I2C and the low-expectation chance-up image I2D are used as the chance-up effect to suggest the chance-up. It is not limited. For example, as a chance up, the jackpot expectation can be displayed concretely (such as "expectation 50%!"), The jackpot expectation can be indicated by color, or the jackpot expectation can be suggested by voice. A predetermined character may be displayed to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect I2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of display is a first period display.
One of the plurality of types of display is a second period display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The first period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed.
The first period display is a display including a cursor display, and is a display including a cursor display.
By moving the cursor display from the start position to the end position via a specific position, it represents the period from the start to the end.
The first period display is a display including a specific position display for notifying the specific position.
By moving the cursor display from the start position to the specific position, it represents the period from the start to the first timing in the certain period.
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display.
The second period display may be executed during the first period display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I2-2]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display different from the first effect display.
The second period display is a timer display.
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, the second effect is based on the first timing and the second timing when the timer display reaches a predetermined value. May perform display,
The gaming machine according to the aspect I2-1.
[Aspect I2-3]
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, when the first timing and the second timing at which the timer display reaches a predetermined value match, the first timing is displayed. The second effect display may be executed at the timing of.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I2-2.
[Aspect I2-4]
When the second period display is executed during the first period display, when the first timing and the second timing at which the timer display reaches a predetermined value do not match, the said The first effect display may be executed at the first timing.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I2-2 or the aspect I2-3.
[Aspect I2-5]
The first effect display is a display including the first chance-up effect.
The second effect display is a display including a second chance-up effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the first chance-up effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-2 to I2-4.
[Aspect I2-6]
The second effect display is an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the first effect display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 5, characterized in that.
[Aspect 7]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of an operation unit image for the player to promote the operation of the operation unit.
When the timer display is being executed, the display of the operation unit image is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-6.

The hold timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. This hold timer effect is during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, at the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. Can be executed. The hold timer effects A and B are effects that can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the hold timer effects C are effects that can be executed with the fluctuations.

[Hold timer production A]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect A.
In the hold timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the hold icon I3 and the timer image I3C are displayed. The hold icon I3 is composed of a first hold icon I3B (up to eight) representing a hold and a second hold icon I3A representing the hold. For the sake of simplicity, in the figure, only the first hold icon (up to four) corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 is shown among the first hold icons I3B. Therefore, the first hold icon I3B in the figure corresponds to the hold image 9A. Hereinafter, the same applies to the hold timer effect.

The timer image I3C is displayed in a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image I3C shown in FIG. 110 (A), 15 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown. The timer image I3C is displayed adjacently so as to be associated with the specific first hold icon I3B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), the time-out display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one along with the hold shift, and then the timer value of the timer image I3C is set to 0 seconds. To. In the upper right of FIG. 110 (B), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, that is, it is shown that all the decorative symbols are changing. Hereinafter, in such a state, the description thereof will be omitted unless it is particularly necessary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the hold change display effect is executed. In this hold change display effect, the color of the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C changes, and a character indicating "heat" is displayed on the hold icon. This makes it possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation has increased in the variation effect corresponding to the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. That is, the hold change display effect suggests the jackpot expectation of the change effect corresponding to the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C.

[Hold timer effect B]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect B.
In the hold timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), the hold icon I3 (first hold icon I3B and second hold icon I3A), the timer image I3C, and the button image I3D are displayed. Since the hold icon I3 and the timer image I3C are the same as those in FIG. 110 (A), the description thereof will be omitted.
The button image I3D is an image suggesting the effect button 63, and it is predicted that the effect using the effect button 63 can be executed from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the time-out display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one along with the hold shift, and then the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes "0" seconds. Will be executed.

Further, in the time-out display effect, the button image I3E is displayed. The button image I3E is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I3E is represented as "PUSH" in the image, and is an image showing a state in which the color of the button image I3D is darkened and / or a state in which the button image I3D is lit. Is. Further, adjacent to the button image I3E, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the hold expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. In this hold expectation suggestion effect, the hold expectation suggestion image I3F is displayed so as to correspond to the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. The hold expectation suggestion image I3F suggests the jackpot expectation of the variable staging corresponding to the associated first hold icon I3B. The hold expectation degree suggestion image I3F is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

[Hold timer effect C]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect C.
In the hold timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the hold icon I3 (first hold icon I3B and second hold icon I3A), the timer image I3C, and the button image I3D are displayed. In this case, the timer image I3C is displayed adjacently so as to be associated with the second hold icon I3A. Since the functions of the hold icon I3, the timer image I3C, and the button image I3D are the same as those in FIG. 111 (A), the description thereof will be omitted. In this hold timer effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), the time-out display effect is executed. In this time-out display effect, the button image I3E is displayed as in FIG. 111 (B), and the effect that the timer value of the timer image I3C is "0" seconds is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), a pseudo continuous staging effect is executed. In this pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream suggestion suggestion image I3G is displayed so as to correspond to the second hold icon I3A associated with the timer image I3C. The pseudo-ream suggestion suggestion image I3G suggests that the pseudo-ream effect is executed and the number of pseudo-ream effects in the variation effect (the variation effect) corresponding to the associated second hold icon I3A. .. The pseudo-ream suggestion suggestion image I3G is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the fluctuation change, during the reach effect, and the like. Along with a production that repeats the production of temporarily stopping at least a part, a production that repeats the production of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo, or a display reminiscent of pseudo-ream such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo". Includes an effect of executing a variable effect of a decorative pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and a predetermined effect (hold) is displayed based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A change display effect, a hold expectation suggestion effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. According to this configuration, the player's interest in the hold can be attracted, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and are associated with the timer image I3C based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A predetermined effect (hold change display effect, hold expectation suggestion effect, or pseudo continuous effect) is executed for the held icon I3. According to this configuration, the player's interest can be more attracted to a specific hold, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, the player can quickly recognize the correspondence between the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3, and the player's interest in a specific hold can be increased. As a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 111, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and are associated with the timer image I3C based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. An effect suggesting a jackpot expectation (a hold change display effect or a hold expectation suggestion effect) is executed for the held icon I3. According to this configuration, the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation is executed for the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C, so that the player's interest can be deepened, and as a result, the player's interest can be deepened. You can improve your interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the hold associated with the timer image I3C is based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. The hold change display effect is executed for the icon I3. According to this configuration, the mode of the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C is changed, so that the player's interest can be deepened, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In this case, a predetermined effect (hold change display effect, hold expectation degree suggestion effect, or pseudo continuous effect) is executed for the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C. According to this configuration, the player can be attracted to the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C until the timer value of the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value, and as a result, the player is interested. Can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 112, when the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), the button image I3E prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. Then, when the player operates the effect button 63, a predetermined effect (holding expectation degree suggestion effect or pseudo continuous effect) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the effect button 63, and it is possible to improve the participation rate in the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the hold timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed in a count-up method in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the value reaches a predetermined value, the above-mentioned time-out display effect can be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the second hold icon I3A, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects such as a hold change display effect as shown in FIG. 110 (C), a hold expectation suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 111 (C), or a chance. An up effect may be performed.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 110 or 111, when the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the first hold icon I3B and the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), the hold change display effect and the hold expectation suggestion effect are produced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects such as a pseudo continuous effect and a chance-up effect may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the hold icon I3, and when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (hold change display effect, (Holding expectation suggestion effect or pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the hold icon I3 and the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 7.77 seconds), a predetermined effect may be executed.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the hold timer effects A to C shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more are displayed. The timer image of the above may be displayed at the same time.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold timer effects A and B shown in FIGS. 110 to 111 are effects that are executed over a plurality of fluctuations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuations. It may be an effect that is executed only by. Further, the hold timer effect C shown in FIG. 112 is an effect executed by the fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an effect executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect I3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons.
The hold icon includes an icon representing hold and an icon representing the hold.
It is configured so that the number of holds can be notified by the number of displayed hold icons.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects.
As one of the plurality of effects, the first effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed.
The first effect is an effect of displaying a timer.
A combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed, and in the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed in association with each other. The second effect is performed based on the timer display of the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I3-2]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed in association with each other, and based on the timer display, the second hold icon associated with the timer display is displayed. Is performed,
The gaming machine according to the aspect I3-1.
[Aspect I3-3]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed adjacent to each other.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I3-1 or the aspect I3-2 [Aspect I3-4].
The second effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot expectation suggestion.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
[Aspect I3-5]
The jackpot expectation suggestion display is a display that may change the mode of the hold icon.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I3-4.
[Aspect I3-6]
In the combination effect, when the timer display of the first effect reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I3-1 to I3-5.
[Aspect I3-7]
Equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by the player
In the combination effect, when the timer display of the first effect reaches a predetermined value, an operation unit image prompting the player to operate the operation unit is displayed, and the player operates the operation unit. At that time, the second production is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I3-1 to I3-6.

The timer ball ejection acquisition effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115. This payout acquisition effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, for example, during the reach effect (super reach effect). In particular, the timer payout acquisition effect can be executed at the end of the reach effect (super reach effect).

[Timer payout acquisition production A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the timer payout acquisition effect A.
In the timer payout acquisition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol array using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown. In FIG. 113 (A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is doublet of 7 symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), the timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, the timer image I4A and the ally character CRA are displayed. The timer image I4A is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image I4A shown in FIG. 113 (B), "5 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), the payout scheduled payout display effect is executed. In the payout scheduled payout display effect, when the timer value of the timer image I4A reaches 0 seconds, the payout schedule payout number suggestion image I4B is displayed. The image I4B suggesting the number of balls to be paid out is an image suggesting the number of balls to be paid out in the big hit game. In the example of FIG. 113 (C), in the image I4B suggesting the number of balls to be paid out, it is shown that 1500 balls can be paid out during the jackpot game.

[Timer payout acquisition production B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the timer payout acquisition effect B.
In the timer payout acquisition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, as in FIG. 113 (A), a jackpot symbol arrangement using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), the timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, the timer image I4A and the ally character CRA are displayed as in FIG. 113 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), the button press promotion display effect is executed. In this button pressing promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4A becomes "0 seconds" and the button image I4C is displayed. The button image I4C is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, the button image I4C is an image represented by "PUSH" in the image and representing a state as if it is lit. Further, adjacent to the button image I4C, the characters "press !!" are also displayed in order to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), the payout scheduled payout display effect is executed. In this payout scheduled payout display effect, the payout schedule payout number suggestion image I4B is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 113 (C) in response to the player pressing the effect button 63.

[Timer payout acquisition production C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the timer payout acquisition effect C.
In the timer payout acquisition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, as in FIG. 113 (A), a jackpot symbol arrangement using decorative symbols is shown.

Next, the timer display effect (timer initial value large) shown in FIG. 115 (B) or the timer display effect (timer initial value small) shown in FIG. 115 (E) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 115 (B), in the timer display effect (timer initial value is large), the timer image I4D of "15 seconds" in which the timer initial value is relatively large is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the button press promotion display effect is executed. In this button pressing promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4D becomes "0 seconds", and the button image I4C is displayed as in FIG. 114 (C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the payout scheduled payout display effect is executed. In this payout scheduled payout display effect, as in FIG. 114 (D), it is suggested that the number of payouts scheduled to be paid out is 1500 balls in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. The image I4B suggesting the number of balls to be paid out is displayed.

On the other hand, in the timer display effect (timer initial value small) shown in FIG. 115 (E), the timer image I4A of "5 seconds" in which the timer initial value is relatively small is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the button press promotion display effect is executed. In this button pressing promotion display effect, the timer value of the timer image I4A becomes "0 seconds" and the button image I4C is displayed, as in FIG. 114 (C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), the payout scheduled payout display effect is executed. In this payout scheduled payout display effect, in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, the payout schedule payout number suggestion image I4E suggesting that the payout number of payouts is 700 balls, which is relatively small. Is displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer payout acquisition effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and images I4B and I4E suggesting the number of balls to be paid out are displayed. According to this configuration, the timer display is performed before the display of suggestion of the number of balls to be paid out is executed, so that the player's interest in the number of balls to be paid out can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the images I4B and I4E suggesting the number of balls to be paid out are displayed. Will be done. According to this configuration, when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the number of balls to be paid out is displayed, so that the player's interest in the number of balls to be paid out can be further improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, button images I4C prompting the player to press the effect button 63 are displayed, and then the player displays the button images I4C. In response to the pressing of the effect button 63, the images I4B and I4E suggesting the number of balls to be paid out are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the feeling of participating in the game, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, when the timer display effect is executed in the timer payout acquisition effect C, the timer image I4D having a relatively large timer initial value is displayed. Compared with the case where the timer image I4A, which has a relatively small initial timer value, is displayed, the value indicating the number of balls to be paid out, which is shown in the image indicating the number of balls to be paid out, is larger than that in the case where the timer image I4A is displayed. .. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the timer display before the display of the image suggesting the number of balls to be paid out is displayed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the timer payout acquisition effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 115, the button image I4C is displayed after the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D become 0 seconds in the button pressing promotion display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button image I4C may be configured to be displayed when the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D reach a predetermined value (for example, 2 seconds) before the timer value reaches 0 seconds.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the timer ball ejection acquisition effect shown in FIGS. 113 to 115 is performed at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol, or during the reach effect (super reach effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer display effect, the button press promotion effect, and the payout scheduled ball output display effect among the timer payout acquisition effects may be configured to be executed during the jackpot game.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer payout acquisition effect shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed. The timer images may be displayed at the same time.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the timer images I4A and I4D are displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the timer images I4A and I4D may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the value reaches a predetermined value, the above-mentioned time-out display effect can be executed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect I4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display.
The above-mentioned display is a display performed when a big hit lottery is won.
In the first aspect, the above indication may be displayed,
In the second aspect, the above indication may be displayed,
The first aspect is a mode including a timer display.
The second aspect is an aspect including a display of suggestion of the number of scheduled payouts, which suggests the number of game media to be paid out during the jackpot game based on the jackpot.
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the second aspect after being displayed in the first aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I4-2]
The certain display is displayed in the second aspect after the timer value of the timer display becomes the first predetermined value in the first aspect.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I4-1.
[Aspect I4-3]
Equipped with an operation unit that accepts the player's operation and can execute a predetermined effect by the player's operation.
In the third aspect, the above-mentioned display may be displayed, and the above-mentioned indication may be displayed.
The third aspect includes displaying an image of the operation unit that prompts the player to operate the operation unit.
The certain display is displayed in the first aspect, displayed in the third aspect when displayed in the first aspect, and then the operation unit is operated by the player. Depending on the above, it may be displayed in the second aspect.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I4-1 or the aspect I4-2.
[Aspect I4-4]
The certain display is displayed in the first aspect, is displayed in the third aspect before the timer value in the first aspect becomes a second predetermined value, and then the operation is performed by the player. Depending on the operation of the unit, it may be displayed in the second aspect.
The gaming machine according to the aspect I4-3.
[Aspect I4-5]
In the first aspect, the initial value of the timer value may be a first value and a second value larger than the first value.
When the initial value of the timer value in the first aspect is the second value in the case where the display is displayed in the first aspect and then displayed in the second aspect in the certain display. Compared with the case where the initial value of the timer value in the first aspect is the first value, the number of game media to be paid out indicated by the expected payout number suggestion display in the second aspect is increased. The value represented is large,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I4-1 to I4-4.

[Other variants]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a handle, a trigger, or the like is used as an operation unit to be operated by the player. May be good. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the sword member 64. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time is represented by using the timer value of the timer image as the timer display, but the time is not limited to this, and the time may be represented by the meter method or the indicator method as the timer display.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

In addition, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the display effect described above may be executed on the sub-display device.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment, and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display device (display means)
9A, 9B, 9C ... Hold icon 15 ... Board movable body 20 ... 1st start port (1st ball entry port)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd ball entry port)
81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an image of the operation means.
Using a part of the image of the operating means, the time until the operating means becomes operable is displayed.
The time until the operation means becomes operable is displayed, and the character display indicating that the operation of the operation means is suspended is performed by using a special image different from the image of the operation means.
The special image is displayed on the front side of the image of the operating means, and the special image is displayed so as to match the character display with the tilt angle of the image of the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images